NOTICE This repository contains the public FTC SDK for the SKYSTONE (2019-2020) competition season. If you are looking for the current season's FTC SDK software, please visit the new and permanent home of the public FTC SDK: FtcRobotController repository Welcome! This GitHub repository contains the source code that is used to build an Android app to control a FIRST Tech Challenge competition robot. To use this SDK, download/clone the entire project to your local computer. Getting Started If you are new to robotics or new to the FIRST Tech Challenge, then you should consider reviewing the FTC Blocks Tutorial to get familiar with how to use the control system: FTC Blocks Online Tutorial Even if you are an advanced Java programmer, it is helpful to start with the FTC Blocks tutorial, and then migrate to the OnBot Java Tool or to Android Studio afterwards. Downloading the Project If you are an Android Studio programmer, there are several ways to download this repo. Note that if you use the Blocks or OnBot Java Tool to program your robot, then you do not need to download this repository. If you are a git user, you can clone the most current version of the repository: git clone https://github.com/FIRST-Tech-Challenge/SKYSTONE.git Or, if you prefer, you can use the "Download Zip" button available through the main repository page. Downloading the project as a .ZIP file will keep the size of the download manageable. You can also download the project folder (as a .zip or .tar.gz archive file) from the Downloads subsection of the Releases page for this repository. Once you have downloaded and uncompressed (if needed) your folder, you can use Android Studio to import the folder ("Import project (Eclipse ADT, Gradle, etc.)"). Getting Help User Documentation and Tutorials FIRST maintains online documentation with information and tutorials on how to use the FIRST Tech Challenge software and robot control system. You can access this documentation using the following link: SKYSTONE Online Documentation Note that the online documentation is an "evergreen" document that is constantly being updated and edited. It contains the most current information about the FIRST Tech Challenge software and control system. Javadoc Reference Material The Javadoc reference documentation for the FTC SDK is now available online. Click on the following link to view the FTC SDK Javadoc documentation as a live website: FTC Javadoc Documentation Documentation for the FTC SDK is also included with this repository. There is a subfolder called "doc" which contains several subfolders: The folder "apk" contains the .apk files for the FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. The folder "javadoc" contains the JavaDoc user documentation for the FTC SDK. Online User Forum For technical questions regarding the Control System or the FTC SDK, please visit the FTC Technology forum: FTC Technology Forum Release Information Version 5.5 (20200824-090813) Version 5.5 requires Android Studio 4.0 or later. New features Adds support for calling custom Java classes from Blocks OpModes (fixes SkyStone issue #161). Classes must be in the org.firstinspires.ftc.teamcode package. Methods must be public static and have no more than 21 parameters. Parameters declared as OpMode, LinearOpMode, Telemetry, and HardwareMap are supported and the argument is provided automatically, regardless of the order of the parameters. On the block, the sockets for those parameters are automatically filled in. Parameters declared as char or java.lang.Character will accept any block that returns text and will only use the first character in the text. Parameters declared as boolean or java.lang.Boolean will accept any block that returns boolean. Parameters declared as byte, java.lang.Byte, short, java.lang.Short, int, java.lang.Integer, long, or java.lang.Long, will accept any block that returns a number and will round that value to the nearest whole number. Parameters declared as float, java.lang.Float, double, java.lang.Double will accept any block that returns a number. Adds telemetry API method for setting display format Classic Monospace HTML (certain tags only) Adds blocks support for switching cameras. Adds Blocks support for TensorFlow Object Detection with a custom model. Adds support for uploading a custom TensorFlow Object Detection model in the Manage page, which is especially useful for Blocks and OnBotJava users. Shows new Control Hub blink codes when the WiFi band is switched using the Control Hub's button (only possible on Control Hub OS 1.1.2) Adds new warnings which can be disabled in the Advanced RC Settings Mismatched app versions warning Unnecessary 2.4 GHz WiFi usage warning REV Hub is running outdated firmware (older than version 1.8.2) Adds support for Sony PS4 gamepad, and reworks how gamepads work on the Driver Station Removes preference which sets gamepad type based on driver position. Replaced with menu which allows specifying type for gamepads with unknown VID and PID Attempts to auto-detect gamepad type based on USB VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known, use type specified by user for that VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known AND the user has not specified a type for that VID and PID, an educated guess is made about how to map the gamepad Driver Station will now attempt to automatically recover from a gamepad disconnecting, and re-assign it to the position it was assigned to when it dropped If only one gamepad is assigned and it drops: it can be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: both will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: neither will be recovered, because of the ambiguity of the gamepads when they re-appear on the USB bus. There is currently one known edge case: if there are two gamepads with the same VID/PID signature plugged in, but only one is assigned, and they BOTH drop, it's a 50-50 chance of which one will be chosen for automatic recovery to the assigned position: it is determined by whichever one is re-enumerated first by the USB bus controller. Adds landscape user interface to Driver Station New feature: practice timer with audio cues New feature (Control Hub only): wireless network connection strength indicator (0-5 bars) New feature (Control Hub only): tapping on the ping/channel display will switch to an alternate display showing radio RX dBm and link speed (tap again to switch back) The layout will NOT autorotate. You can switch the layout from the Driver Station's settings menu. Breaking changes Removes support for Android versions 4.4 through 5.1 (KitKat and Lollipop). The minSdkVersion is now 23. Removes the deprecated LinearOpMode methods waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() Enhancements Handles RS485 address of Control Hub automatically The Control Hub is automatically given a reserved address Existing configuration files will continue to work All addresses in the range of 1-10 are still available for Expansion Hubs The Control Hub light will now normally be solid green, without blinking to indicate the address The Control Hub will not be shown on the Expansion Hub Address Change settings page Improves REV Hub firmware updater The user can now choose between all available firmware update files Version 1.8.2 of the REV Hub firmware is bundled into the Robot Controller app. Text was added to clarify that Expansion Hubs can only be updated via USB. Firmware update speed was reduced to improve reliability Allows REV Hub firmware to be updated directly from the Manage webpage Improves log viewer on Robot Controller Horizontal scrolling support (no longer word wrapped) Supports pinch-to-zoom Uses a monospaced font Error messages are highlighted New color scheme Attempts to force-stop a runaway/stuck OpMode without restarting the entire app Not all types of runaway conditions are stoppable, but if the user code attempts to talk to hardware during the runaway, the system should be able to capture it. Makes various tweaks to the Self Inspect screen Renames "OS version" entry to "Android version" Renames "WiFi Direct Name" to "WiFi Name" Adds Control Hub OS version, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Hides the airplane mode entry, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Removes check for ZTE Speed Channel Changer Shows firmware version for all Expansion and Control Hubs Reworks network settings portion of Manage page All network settings are now applied with a single click The WiFi Direct channel of phone-based Robot Controllers can now be changed from the Manage page WiFi channels are filtered by band (2.4 vs 5 GHz) and whether they overlap with other channels The current WiFi channel is pre-selected on phone-based Robot Controllers, and Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later. On Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later, you can choose to have the system automatically select a channel on the 5 GHz band Improves OnBotJava New light and dark themes replace the old themes (chaos, github, chrome,...) the new default theme is light and will be used when you first update to this version OnBotJava now has a tabbed editor Read-only offline mode Improves function of "exit" menu item on Robot Controller and Driver Station Now guaranteed to be fully stopped and unloaded from memory Shows a warning message if a LinearOpMode exists prematurely due to failure to monitor for the start condition Improves error message shown when the Driver Station and Robot Controller are incompatible with each other Driver Station OpMode Control Panel now disabled while a Restart Robot is in progress Disables advanced settings related to WiFi direct when the Robot Controller is a Control Hub. Tint phone battery icons on Driver Station when low/critical. Uses names "Control Hub Portal" and "Control Hub" (when appropriate) in new configuration files Improve I2C read performance Very large improvement on Control Hub; up to ~2x faster with small (e.g. 6 byte) reads Not as apparent on Expansion Hubs connected to a phone Update/refresh build infrastructure Update to 'androidx' support library from 'com.android.support:appcompat', which is end-of-life Update targetSdkVersion and compileSdkVersion to 28 Update Android Studio's Android plugin to latest Fix reported build timestamp in 'About' screen Add sample illustrating manual webcam use: ConceptWebcam Bug fixes Fixes SkyStone issue #248 Fixes SkyStone issue #232 and modifies bulk caching semantics to allow for cache-preserving MANUAL/AUTO transitions. Improves performance when REV 2M distance sensor is unplugged Improves readability of Toast messages on certain devices Allows a Driver Station to connect to a Robot Controller after another has disconnected Improves generation of fake serial numbers for UVC cameras which do not provide a real serial number Previously some devices would assign such cameras a serial of 0:0 and fail to open and start streaming Fixes ftc_app issue #638. Fixes a slew of bugs with the Vuforia camera monitor including: Fixes bug where preview could be displayed with a wonky aspect ratio Fixes bug where preview could be cut off in landscape Fixes bug where preview got totally messed up when rotating phone Fixes bug where crosshair could drift off target when using webcams Fixes issue in UVC driver on some devices (ftc_app 681) if streaming was started/stopped multiple times in a row Issue manifested as kernel panic on devices which do not have this kernel patch. On affected devices which do have the patch, the issue was manifest as simply a failure to start streaming. The Tech Team believes that the root cause of the issue is a bug in the Linux kernel XHCI driver. A workaround was implemented in the SDK UVC driver. Fixes bug in UVC driver where often half the frames from the camera would be dropped (e.g. only 15FPS delivered during a streaming session configured for 30FPS). Fixes issue where TensorFlow Object Detection would show results whose confidence was lower than the minimum confidence parameter. Fixes a potential exploitation issue of CVE-2019-11358 in OnBotJava Fixes changing the address of an Expansion Hub with additional Expansion Hubs connected to it Preserves the Control Hub's network connection when "Restart Robot" is selected Fixes issue where device scans would fail while the Robot was restarting Fix RenderScript usage Use androidx.renderscript variant: increased compatibility Use RenderScript in Java mode, not native: simplifies build Fixes webcam-frame-to-bitmap conversion problem: alpha channel wasn't being initialized, only R, G, & B Fixes possible arithmetic overflow in Deadline Fixes deadlock in Vuforia webcam support which could cause 5-second delays when stopping OpMode Version 5.4 (20200108-101156) Fixes SkyStone issue #88 Adds an inspection item that notes when a robot controller (Control Hub) is using the factory default password. Fixes SkyStone issue #61 Fixes SkyStone issue #142 Fixes ftc_app issue #417 by adding more current and voltage monitoring capabilities for REV Hubs. Fixes a crash sometimes caused by OnBotJava activity Improves OnBotJava autosave functionality ftc_app #738 Fixes system responsiveness issue when an Expansion Hub is disconnected Fixes issue where IMU initialization could prevent Op Modes from stopping Fixes issue where AndroidTextToSpeech.speak() would fail if it was called too early Adds telemetry.speak() methods and blocks, which cause the Driver Station (if also updated) to speak text Adds and improves Expansion Hub-related warnings Improves Expansion Hub low battery warning Displays the warning immediately after the hub reports it Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Displays which hubs reported low battery Displays warning when hub loses and regains power during an OpMode run Fixes the hub's LED pattern after this condition Displays warning when Expansion Hub is not responding to commands Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Clarifies warning when Expansion Hub is not present at startup Specifies that this condition requires a Robot Restart before the hub can be used. The hub light will now accurately reflect this state Improves logging and reduces log spam during these conditions Syncs the Control Hub time and timezone to a connected web browser programming the robot, if a Driver Station is not available. Adds bulk read functionality for REV Hubs A bulk caching mode must be set at the Hub level with LynxModule#setBulkCachingMode(). This applies to all relevant SDK hardware classes that reference that Hub. The following following Hub bulk caching modes are available: BulkCachingMode.OFF (default): All hardware calls operate as usual. Bulk data can read through LynxModule#getBulkData() and processed manually. BulkCachingMode.AUTO: Applicable hardware calls are served from a bulk read cache that is cleared/refreshed automatically to ensure identical commands don't hit the same cache. The cache can also be cleared manually with LynxModule#clearBulkCache(), although this is not recommended. (advanced users) BulkCachingMode.MANUAL: Same as BulkCachingMode.AUTO except the cache is never cleared automatically. To avoid getting stale data, the cache must be manually cleared at the beginning of each loop body or as the user deems appropriate. Removes PIDF Annotation values added in Rev 5.3 (to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations). The new motor types will still be available but their Default control behavior will revert back to Rev 5.2 Adds new ConceptMotorBulkRead sample Opmode to demonstrate and compare Motor Bulk-Read modes for reducing I/O latencies. Version 5.3 (20191004-112306) Fixes external USB/UVC webcam support Makes various bugfixes and improvements to Blocks page, including but not limited to: Many visual tweaks Browser zoom and window resize behave better Resizing the Java preview pane works better and more consistently across browsers The Java preview pane consistently gets scrollbars when needed The Java preview pane is hidden by default on phones Internet Explorer 11 should work Large dropdown lists display properly on lower res screens Disabled buttons are now visually identifiable as disabled A warning is shown if a user selects a TFOD sample, but their device is not compatible Warning messages in a Blocks op mode are now visible by default. Adds goBILDA 5201 and 5202 motors to Robot Configurator Adds PIDF Annotation values to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations. This has the effect of causing the RUN_USING_ENCODERS and RUN_TO_POSITION modes to use PIDF vs PID closed loop control on these motors. This should provide more responsive, yet stable, speed control. PIDF adds Feedforward control to the basic PID control loop. Feedforward is useful when controlling a motor's speed because it "anticipates" how much the control voltage must change to achieve a new speed set-point, rather than requiring the integrated error to change sufficiently. The PIDF values were chosen to provide responsive, yet stable, speed control on a lightly loaded motor. The more heavily a motor is loaded (drag or friction), the more noticable the PIDF improvement will be. Fixes startup crash on Android 10 Fixes ftc_app issue #712 (thanks to FROGbots-4634) Fixes ftc_app issue #542 Allows "A" and lowercase letters when naming device through RC and DS apps. Version 5.2 (20190905-083277) Fixes extra-wide margins on settings activities, and placement of the new configuration button Adds Skystone Vuforia image target data. Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Blocks). Adds TensorFlow inference model (.tflite) for Skystone game elements. Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Blocks). Removes older (season-specific) sample op modes. Includes 64-bit support (to comply with Google Play requirements). Protects against Stuck OpModes when a Restart Robot is requested. (Thanks to FROGbots-4634) (ftc_app issue #709) Blocks related changes: Fixes bug with blocks generated code when hardware device name is a java or javascript reserved word. Shows generated java code for blocks, even when hardware items are missing from the active configuration. Displays warning icon when outdated Vuforia and TensorFlow blocks are used (SkyStone issue #27) Version 5.1 (20190820-222104) Defines default PIDF parameters for the following motors: REV Core Hex Motor REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor REV 40:1 HD Hex Motor Adds back button when running on a device without a system back button (such as a Control Hub) Allows a REV Control Hub to update the firmware on a REV Expansion Hub via USB Fixes SkyStone issue #9 Fixes ftc_app issue #715 Prevents extra DS User clicks by filtering based on current state. Prevents incorrect DS UI state changes when receiving new OpMode list from RC Adds support for REV Color Sensor V3 Adds a manual-refresh DS Camera Stream for remotely viewing RC camera frames. To show the stream on the DS, initialize but do not run a stream-enabled opmode, select the Camera Stream option in the DS menu, and tap the image to refresh. This feature is automatically enabled when using Vuforia or TFOD—no additional RC configuration is required for typical use cases. To hide the stream, select the same menu item again. Note that gamepads are disabled and the selected opmode cannot be started while the stream is open as a safety precaution. To use custom streams, consult the API docs for CameraStreamServer#setSource and CameraStreamSource. Adds many Star Wars sounds to RobotController resources. Added SKYSTONE Sounds Chooser Sample Program. Switches out startup, connect chimes, and error/warning sounds for Star Wars sounds Updates OnBot Java to use a WebSocket for communication with the robot The OnBot Java page no longer has to do a full refresh when a user switches from editing one file to another Known issues: Camera Stream The Vuforia camera stream inherits the issues present in the phone preview (namely ftc_app issue #574). This problem does not affect the TFOD camera stream even though it receives frames from Vuforia. The orientation of the stream frames may not always match the phone preview. For now, these frames may be rotated manually via a custom CameraStreamSource if desired. OnBotJava Browser back button may not always work correctly It's possible for a build to be queued, but not started. The OnBot Java build console will display a warning if this occurs. A user might not realize they are editing a different file if the user inadvertently switches from one file to another since this switch is now seamless. The name of the currently open file is displayed in the browser tab. Version 5.0 (built on 19.06.14) Support for the REV Robotics Control Hub. Adds a Java preview pane to the Blocks editor. Adds a new offline export feature to the Blocks editor. Display wifi channel in Network circle on Driver Station. Adds calibration for Logitech C270 Updates build tooling and target SDK. Compliance with Google's permissions infrastructure (Required after build tooling update). Keep Alives to mitigate the Motorola wifi scanning problem. Telemetry substitute no longer necessary. Improves Vuforia error reporting. Fixes ftctechnh/ftc_app issues 621, 713. Miscellaneous bug fixes and improvements. Version 4.3 (built on 18.10.31) Includes missing TensorFlow-related libraries and files. Version 4.2 (built on 18.10.30) Includes fix to avoid deadlock situation with WatchdogMonitor which could result in USB communication errors. Comm error appeared to require that user disconnect USB cable and restart the Robot Controller app to recover. robotControllerLog.txt would have error messages that included the words "E RobotCore: lynx xmit lock: #### abandoning lock:" Includes fix to correctly list the parent module address for a REV Robotics Expansion Hub in a configuration (.xml) file. Bug in versions 4.0 and 4.1 would incorrect list the address module for a parent REV Robotics device as "1". If the parent module had a higher address value than the daisy-chained module, then this bug would prevent the Robot Controller from communicating with the downstream Expansion Hub. Added requirement for ACCESS_COARSE_LOCATION to allow a Driver Station running Android Oreo to scan for Wi-Fi Direct devices. Added google() repo to build.gradle because aapt2 must be downloaded from the google() repository beginning with version 3.2 of the Android Gradle Plugin. Important Note: Android Studio users will need to be connected to the Internet the first time build the ftc_app project. Internet connectivity is required for the first build so the appropriate files can be downloaded from the Google repository. Users should not need to be connected to the Internet for subsequent builds. This should also fix buid issue where Android Studio would complain that it "Could not find com.android.tools.lint:lint-gradle:26.1.4" (or similar). Added support for REV Spark Mini motor controller as part of the configuration menu for a servo/PWM port on the REV Expansion Hub. Provide examples for playing audio files in an Op Mode. Block Development Tool Changes Includes a fix for a problem with the Velocity blocks that were reported in the FTC Technology forum (Blocks Programming subforum). Change the "Save completed successfully." message to a white color so it will contrast with a green background. Fixed the "Download image" feature so it will work if there are text blocks in the op mode. Introduce support for Google's TensorFlow Lite technology for object detetion for 2018-2019 game. TensorFlow lite can recognize Gold Mineral and Silver Mineral from 2018-2019 game. Example Java and Block op modes are included to show how to determine the relative position of the gold block (left, center, right). Version 4.1 (released on 18.09.24) Changes include: Fix to prevent crash when deprecated configuration annotations are used. Change to allow FTC Robot Controller APK to be auto-updated using FIRST Global Control Hub update scripts. Removed samples for non supported / non legal hardware. Improvements to Telemetry.addData block with "text" socket. Updated Blocks sample op mode list to include Rover Ruckus Vuforia example. Update SDK library version number. Version 4.0 (released on 18.09.12) Changes include: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras If UVC camera has a unique serial number, RC will detect and enumerate by serial number. If UVC camera lacks a unique serial number, RC will only support one camera of that type connected. Calibration settings for a few cameras are included (see TeamCode/src/main/res/xml/teamwebcamcalibrations.xml for details). User can upload calibration files from Program and Manage web interface. UVC cameras seem to draw a fair amount of electrical current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. Updated sample Vuforia Navigation and VuMark Op Modes to demonstrate how to use an internal phone-based camera and an external UVC webcam. Support for improved motor control. REV Robotics Expansion Hub firmware 1.8 and greater will support a feed forward mechanism for closed loop motor control. FTC SDK has been modified to support PIDF coefficients (proportional, integral, derivative, and feed forward). FTC Blocks development tool modified to include PIDF programming blocks. Deprecated older PID-related methods and variables. REV's 1.8.x PIDF-related changes provide a more linear and accurate way to control a motor. Wireless Added 5GHz support for wireless channel changing for those devices that support it. Tested with Moto G5 and E4 phones. Also tested with other (currently non-approved) phones such as Samsung Galaxy S8. Improved Expansion Hub firmware update support in Robot Controller app Changes to make the system more robust during the firmware update process (when performed through Robot Controller app). User no longer has to disconnect a downstream daisy-chained Expansion Hub when updating an Expansion Hub's firmware. If user is updating an Expansion Hub's firmware through a USB connection, he/she does not have to disconnect RS485 connection to other Expansion Hubs. The user still must use a USB connection to update an Expansion Hub's firmware. The user cannot update the Expansion Hub firmware for a downstream device that is daisy chained through an RS485 connection. If an Expansion Hub accidentally gets "bricked" the Robot Controller app is now more likely to recognize the Hub when it scans the USB bus. Robot Controller app should be able to detect an Expansion Hub, even if it accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Robot Controller app should be able to install the firmware onto the Hub, even if if accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Resiliency FTC software can detect and enable an FTDI reset feature that is available with REV Robotics v1.8 Expansion Hub firmware and greater. When enabled, the Expansion Hub can detect if it hasn't communicated with the Robot Controller over the FTDI (USB) connection. If the Hub hasn't heard from the Robot Controller in a while, it will reset the FTDI connection. This action helps system recover from some ESD-induced disruptions. Various fixes to improve reliability of FTC software. Blocks Fixed errors with string and list indices in blocks export to java. Support for USB connected UVC webcams. Refactored optimized Blocks Vuforia code to support Rover Ruckus image targets. Added programming blocks to support PIDF (proportional, integral, derivative and feed forward) motor control. Added formatting options (under Telemetry and Miscellaneous categories) so user can set how many decimal places to display a numerical value. Support to play audio files (which are uploaded through Blocks web interface) on Driver Station in addition to the Robot Controller. Fixed bug with Download Image of Blocks feature. Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Added blocks for DcMotorEx methods. These are enhanced methods that you can use when supported by the motor controller hardware. The REV Robotics Expansion Hub supports these enhanced methods. Enhanced methods include methods to get/set motor velocity (in encoder pulses per second), get/set PIDF coefficients, etc.. Modest Improvements in Logging Decrease frequency of battery checker voltage statements. Removed non-FTC related log statements (wherever possible). Introduced a "Match Logging" feature. Under "Settings" a user can enable/disable this feature (it's disabled by default). If enabled, user provides a "Match Number" through the Driver Station user interface (top of the screen). The Match Number is used to create a log file specifically with log statements from that particular Op Mode run. Match log files are stored in /sdcard/FIRST/matlogs on the Robot Controller. Once an op mode run is complete, the Match Number is cleared. This is a convenient way to create a separate match log with statements only related to a specific op mode run. New Devices Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added configuration option for REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Miscellaneous Fixed some errors in the definitions for acceleration and velocity in our javadoc documentation. Added ability to play audio files on Driver Station When user is configuring an Expansion Hub, the LED on the Expansion Hub will change blink pattern (purple-cyan) to indicate which Hub is currently being configured. Renamed I2cSensorType to I2cDeviceType. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates localization using 2018-2019 (Rover Ruckus presented by QualComm) Vuforia targets. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics 2m Laser Distance Sensor. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Re-categorized external Java sample Op Modes to "TeleOp" instead of "Autonomous". Known issues: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras UVC cameras seem to draw significant amount of current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. There might be a possible deadlock which causes the RC to become unresponsive when using a UVC webcam with a Nougat Android Robot Controller. Wireless When user selects a wireless channel, this channel does not necessarily persist if the phone is power cycled. Tech Team is hoping to eventually address this issue in a future release. Issue has been present since apps were introduced (i.e., it is not new with the v4.0 release). Wireless channel is not currently displayed for WiFi Direct connections. Miscellaneous The blink indication feature that shows which Expansion Hub is currently being configured does not work for a newly created configuration file. User has to first save a newly created configuration file and then close and re-edit the file in order for blink indicator to work. Version 3.6 (built on 17.12.18) Changes include: Blocks Changes Uses updated Google Blockly software to allow users to edit their op modes on Apple iOS devices (including iPad and iPhone). Improvement in Blocks tool to handle corrupt op mode files. Autonomous op modes should no longer get switched back to tele-op after re-opening them to be edited. The system can now detect type mismatches during runtime and alert the user with a message on the Driver Station. Updated javadoc documentation for setPower() method to reflect correct range of values (-1 to +1). Modified VuforiaLocalizerImpl to allow for user rendering of frames Added a user-overrideable onRenderFrame() method which gets called by the class's renderFrame() method. Version 3.5 (built on 17.10.30) Changes with version 3.5 include: Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which can occur after the Robot Controller app has been paused and then resumed (for example, when a user temporarily turns off the display of the Robot Controller phone, and then turns the screen back on). Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which were previously caused by random peer disconnect events on the Driver Station. Fixes issue where log files would be closed on pause of the RC or DS, but not re-opened upon resume. Fixes issue with battery handler (voltage) start/stop race. Fixes issue where Android Studio generated op modes would disappear from available list in certain situations. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build on REV Robotics Control Hub. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build if the date and time on the Robot Controller device was "rewound" (set to an earlier date/time). Improved error message on OnBot Java that occurs when renaming a file fails. Removed unneeded resources from android.jar binaries used by OnBot Java to reduce final size of Robot Controller app. Added MR_ANALOG_TOUCH_SENSOR block to Blocks Programming Tool. Version 3.4 (built on 17.09.06) Changes with version 3.4 include: Added telemetry.update() statement for BlankLinearOpMode template. Renamed sample Block op modes to be more consistent with Java samples. Added some additional sample Block op modes. Reworded OnBot Java readme slightly. Version 3.3 (built on 17.09.04) This version of the software includes improves for the FTC Blocks Programming Tool and the OnBot Java Programming Tool. Changes with verion 3.3 include: Android Studio ftc_app project has been updated to use Gradle Plugin 2.3.3. Android Studio ftc_app project is already using gradle 3.5 distribution. Robot Controller log has been renamed to /sdcard/RobotControllerLog.txt (note that this change was actually introduced w/ v3.2). Improvements in I2C reliability. Optimized I2C read for REV Expansion Hub, with v1.7 firmware or greater. Updated all external/samples (available through OnBot and in Android project folder). Vuforia Added support for VuMarks that will be used for the 2017-2018 season game. Blocks Update to latest Google Blockly release. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixed bug where the blocks would disappear temporarily when mouse button is held down. Added blocks for Range.clip and Range.scale. User can now disable/enable Block op modes. Fix to prevent occasional Blocks deadlock. OnBot Java Significant improvements with autocomplete function for OnBot Java editor. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixes and changes to complete hardware setup feature. Updated (and more useful) onBot welcome message. Known issues: Android Studio After updating to the new v3.3 Android Studio project folder, if you get error messages indicating "InvalidVirtualFileAccessException" then you might need to do a File->Invalidate Caches / Restart to clear the error. OnBot Java Sometimes when you push the build button to build all op modes, the RC returns an error message that the build failed. If you press the build button a second time, the build typically suceeds. Version 3.2 (built on 17.08.02) This version of the software introduces the "OnBot Java" Development Tool. Similar to the FTC Blocks Development Tool, the FTC OnBot Java Development Tool allows a user to create, edit and build op modes dynamically using only a Javascript-enabled web browser. The OnBot Java Development Tool is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is served up by the Robot Controller. Op modes are created and edited using a Javascript-enabled browser (Google Chromse is recommended). Op modes are saved on the Robot Controller Android device directly. The OnBot Java Development Tool provides a Java programming environment that does NOT need Android Studio. Changes with version 3.2 include: Enhanced web-based development tools Introduction of OnBot Java Development Tool. Web-based programming and management features are "always on" (user no longer needs to put Robot Controller into programming mode). Web-based management interface (where user can change Robot Controller name and also easily download Robot Controller log file). OnBot Java, Blocks and Management features available from web based interface. Blocks Programming Development Tool: Changed "LynxI2cColorRangeSensor" block to "REV Color/range sensor" block. Fixed tooltip for ColorSensor.isLightOn block. Added blocks for ColorSensor.getNormalizedColors and LynxI2cColorRangeSensor.getNormalizedColors. Added example op modes for digital touch sensor and REV Robotics Color Distance sensor. User selectable color themes. Includes many minor enhancements and fixes (too numerous to list). Known issues: Auto complete function is incomplete and does not support the following (for now): Access via this keyword Access via super keyword Members of the super cloass, not overridden by the class Any methods provided in the current class Inner classes Can't handle casted objects Any objects coming from an parenthetically enclosed expression Version 3.10 (built on 17.05.09) This version of the software provides support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub. This version also includes improvements in the USB communication layer in an effort to enhance system resiliency. If you were using a 2.x version of the software previously, updating to version 3.1 requires that you also update your Driver Station software in addition to updating the Robot Controller software. Also note that in version 3.10 software, the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods are no longer available (not deprecated, they have been removed from the SDK). Also note that the the new 3.x software incorporates motor profiles that a user can select as he/she configures the robot. Changes include: Blocks changes Added VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener.getPose and Vuforia.trackPose blocks. Added optimized blocks support for Vuforia extended tracking. Added atan2 block to the math category. Added useCompetitionFieldTargetLocations parameter to Vuforia.initialize block. If set to false, the target locations are placed at (0,0,0) with target orientation as specified in https://github.com/gearsincorg/FTCVuforiaDemo/blob/master/Robot_Navigation.java tutorial op mode. Incorporates additional improvements to USB comm layer to improve system resiliency (to recover from a greater number of communication disruptions). Additional Notes Regarding Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) In addition to the release changes listed below (see section labeled "Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.013)"), version 3.00 has the following important changes: Version 3.00 software uses a new version of the FTC Robocol (robot protocol). If you upgrade to v3.0 on the Robot Controller and/or Android Studio side, you must also upgrade the Driver Station software to match the new Robocol. Version 3.00 software removes the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods from the DcMotor class. If you have an op mode that formerly used these methods, you will need to remove the references/calls to these methods. Instead, v3.0 provides the max speed information through the use of motor profiles that are selected by the user during robot configuration. Version 3.00 software currently does not have a mechanism to disable extra i2c sensors. We hope to re-introduce this function with a release in the near future. Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** This software is being released as an "alpha" version. Use this version at your own risk! This pre-release software contains SIGNIFICANT changes, including changes to the Wi-Fi Direct pairing mechanism, rewrites of the I2C sensor classes, changes to the USB/FTDI layer, and the introduction of support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub and the REV Robotics color-range-light sensor. These changes were implemented to improve the reliability and resiliency of the FTC control system. Please note, however, that version 3.00 is considered "alpha" code. This code is being released so that the FIRST community will have an opportunity to test the new REV Expansion Hub electronics module when it becomes available in May. The developers do not recommend using this code for critical applications (i.e., competition use). *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** Changes include: Major rework of sensor-related infrastructure. Includes rewriting sensor classes to implement synchronous I2C communication. Fix to reset Autonomous timer back to 30 seconds. Implementation of specific motor profiles for approved 12V motors (includes Tetrix, AndyMark, Matrix and REV models). Modest improvements to enhance Wi-Fi P2P pairing. Fixes telemetry log addition race. Publishes all the sources (not just a select few). Includes Block programming improvements Addition of optimized Vuforia blocks. Auto scrollbar to projects and sounds pages. Fixed blocks paste bug. Blocks execute after while-opModeIsActive loop (to allow for cleanup before exiting op mode). Added gyro integratedZValue block. Fixes bug with projects page for Firefox browser. Added IsSpeaking block to AndroidTextToSpeech. Implements support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub Implements support for integral REV IMU (physically installed on I2C bus 0, uses same Bosch BNO055 9 axis absolute orientation sensor as Adafruit 9DOF abs orientation sensor). - Implements support for REV color/range/light sensor. Provides support to update Expansion Hub firmware through FTC SDK. Detects REV firmware version and records in log file. Includes support for REV Control Hub (note that the REV Control Hub is not yet approved for FTC use). Implements FTC Blocks programming support for REV Expansion Hub and sensor hardware. Detects and alerts when I2C device disconnect. Version 2.62 (built on 17.01.07) Added null pointer check before calling modeToByte() in finishModeSwitchIfNecessary method for ModernRoboticsUsbDcMotorController class. Changes to enhance Modern Robotics USB protocol robustness. Version 2.61 (released on 16.12.19) Blocks Programming mode changes: Fix to correct issue when an exception was thrown because an OpticalDistanceSensor object appears twice in the hardware map (the second time as a LightSensor). Version 2.6 (released on 16.12.16) Fixes for Gyro class: Improve (decrease) sensor refresh latency. fix isCalibrating issues. Blocks Programming mode changes: Blocks now ignores a device in the configuration xml if the name is empty. Other devices work in configuration work fine. Version 2.5 (internal release on released on 16.12.13) Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks support for AdafruitBNO055IMU. Added Download Op Mode button to FtcBocks.html. Added support for copying blocks in one OpMode and pasting them in an other OpMode. The clipboard content is stored on the phone, so the programming mode server must be running. Modified Utilities section of the toolbox. In Programming Mode, display information about the active connections. Fixed paste location when workspace has been scrolled. Added blocks support for the android Accelerometer. Fixed issue where Blocks Upload Op Mode truncated name at first dot. Added blocks support for Android SoundPool. Added type safety to blocks for Acceleration. Added type safety to blocks for AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AnalogInput. Added type safety to blocks for AngularVelocity. Added type safety to blocks for Color. Added type safety to blocks for ColorSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CRServo. Added type safety to blocks for DigitalChannel. Added type safety to blocks for ElapsedTime. Added type safety to blocks for Gamepad. Added type safety to blocks for GyroSensor. Added type safety to blocks for IrSeekerSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LED. Added type safety to blocks for LightSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LinearOpMode. Added type safety to blocks for MagneticFlux. Added type safety to blocks for MatrixF. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cCompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cRangeSensor. Added type safety to blocks for OpticalDistanceSensor. Added type safety to blocks for Orientation. Added type safety to blocks for Position. Added type safety to blocks for Quaternion. Added type safety to blocks for Servo. Added type safety to blocks for ServoController. Added type safety to blocks for Telemetry. Added type safety to blocks for Temperature. Added type safety to blocks for TouchSensor. Added type safety to blocks for UltrasonicSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VectorF. Added type safety to blocks for Velocity. Added type safety to blocks for VoltageSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaLocalizer.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackable. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackables. Added type safety to blocks for enums in AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AndroidAccelerometer, AndroidGyroscope, AndroidOrientation, and AndroidTextToSpeech. Version 2.4 (released on 16.11.13) Fix to avoid crashing for nonexistent resources. Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks to support OpenGLMatrix, MatrixF, and VectorF. Added blocks to support AngleUnit, AxesOrder, AxesReference, CameraDirection, CameraMonitorFeedback, DistanceUnit, and TempUnit. Added blocks to support Acceleration. Added blocks to support LinearOpMode.getRuntime. Added blocks to support MagneticFlux and Position. Fixed typos. Made blocks for ElapsedTime more consistent with other objects. Added blocks to support Quaternion, Velocity, Orientation, AngularVelocity. Added blocks to support VuforiaTrackables, VuforiaTrackable, VuforiaLocalizer, VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener. Fixed a few blocks. Added type checking to new blocks. Updated to latest blockly. Added default variable blocks to navigation and matrix blocks. Fixed toolbox entry for openGLMatrix_rotation_withAxesArgs. When user downloads Blocks-generated op mode, only the .blk file is downloaded. When user uploads Blocks-generated op mode (.blk file), Javascript code is auto generated. Added DbgLog support. Added logging when a blocks file is read/written. Fixed bug to properly render blocks even if missing devices from configuration file. Added support for additional characters (not just alphanumeric) for the block file names (for download and upload). Added support for OpMode flavor (“Autonomous” or “TeleOp”) and group. Changes to Samples to prevent tutorial issues. Incorporated suggested changes from public pull 216 (“Replace .. paths”). Remove Servo Glitches when robot stopped. if user hits “Cancels” when editing a configuration file, clears the unsaved changes and reverts to original unmodified configuration. Added log info to help diagnose why the Robot Controller app was terminated (for example, by watch dog function). Added ability to transfer log from the controller. Fixed inconsistency for AngularVelocity Limit unbounded growth of data for telemetry. If user does not call telemetry.update() for LinearOpMode in a timely manner, data added for telemetry might get lost if size limit is exceeded. Version 2.35 (released on 16.10.06) Blockly programming mode - Removed unnecesary idle() call from blocks for new project. Version 2.30 (released on 16.10.05) Blockly programming mode: Mechanism added to save Blockly op modes from Programming Mode Server onto local device To avoid clutter, blocks are displayed in categorized folders Added support for DigitalChannel Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cCompassSensor Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cRangeSensor Added support for VoltageSensor Added support for AnalogInput Added support for AnalogOutput Fix for CompassSensor setMode block Vuforia Fix deadlock / make camera data available while Vuforia is running. Update to Vuforia 6.0.117 (recommended by Vuforia and Google to close security loophole). Fix for autonomous 30 second timer bug (where timer was in effect, even though it appeared to have timed out). opModeIsActive changes to allow cleanup after op mode is stopped (with enforced 2 second safety timeout). Fix to avoid reading i2c twice. Updated sample Op Modes. Improved logging and fixed intermittent freezing. Added digital I/O sample. Cleaned up device names in sample op modes to be consistent with Pushbot guide. Fix to allow use of IrSeekerSensorV3. Version 2.20 (released on 16.09.08) Support for Modern Robotics Compass Sensor. Support for Modern Robotics Range Sensor. Revise device names for Pushbot templates to match the names used in Pushbot guide. Fixed bug so that IrSeekerSensorV3 device is accessible as IrSeekerSensor in hardwareMap. Modified computer vision code to require an individual Vuforia license (per legal requirement from PTC). Minor fixes. Blockly enhancements: Support for Voltage Sensor. Support for Analog Input. Support for Analog Output. Support for Light Sensor. Support for Servo Controller. Version 2.10 (released on 16.09.03) Support for Adafruit IMU. Improvements to ModernRoboticsI2cGyro class Block on reset of z axis. isCalibrating() returns true while gyro is calibration. Updated sample gyro program. Blockly enhancements support for android.graphics.Color. added support for ElapsedTime. improved look and legibility of blocks. support for compass sensor. support for ultrasonic sensor. support for IrSeeker. support for LED. support for color sensor. support for CRServo prompt user to configure robot before using programming mode. Provides ability to disable audio cues. various bug fixes and improvements. Version 2.00 (released on 16.08.19) This is the new release for the upcoming 2016-2017 FIRST Tech Challenge Season. Channel change is enabled in the FTC Robot Controller app for Moto G 2nd and 3rd Gen phones. Users can now use annotations to register/disable their Op Modes. Changes in the Android SDK, JDK and build tool requirements (minsdk=19, java 1.7, build tools 23.0.3). Standardized units in analog input. Cleaned up code for existing analog sensor classes. setChannelMode and getChannelMode were REMOVED from the DcMotorController class. This is important - we no longer set the motor modes through the motor controller. setMode and getMode were added to the DcMotor class. ContinuousRotationServo class has been added to the FTC SDK. Range.clip() method has been overloaded so it can support this operation for int, short and byte integers. Some changes have been made (new methods added) on how a user can access items from the hardware map. Users can now set the zero power behavior for a DC motor so that the motor will brake or float when power is zero. Prototype Blockly Programming Mode has been added to FTC Robot Controller. Users can place the Robot Controller into this mode, and then use a device (such as a laptop) that has a Javascript enabled browser to write Blockly-based Op Modes directly onto the Robot Controller. Users can now configure the robot remotely through the FTC Driver Station app. Android Studio project supports Android Studio 2.1.x and compile SDK Version 23 (Marshmallow). Vuforia Computer Vision SDK integrated into FTC SDK. Users can use sample vision targets to get localization information on a standard FTC field. Project structure has been reorganized so that there is now a TeamCode package that users can use to place their local/custom Op Modes into this package. Inspection function has been integrated into the FTC Robot Controller and Driver Station Apps (Thanks Team HazMat… 9277 & 10650!). Audio cues have been incorporated into FTC SDK. Swap mechanism added to FTC Robot Controller configuration activity. For example, if you have two motor controllers on a robot, and you misidentified them in your configuration file, you can use the Swap button to swap the devices within the configuration file (so you do not have to manually re-enter in the configuration info for the two devices). Fix mechanism added to all user to replace an electronic module easily. For example, suppose a servo controller dies on your robot. You replace the broken module with a new module, which has a different serial number from the original servo controller. You can use the Fix button to automatically reconfigure your configuration file to use the serial number of the new module. Improvements made to fix resiliency and responsiveness of the system. For LinearOpMode the user now must for a telemetry.update() to update the telemetry data on the driver station. This update() mechanism ensures that the driver station gets the updated data properly and at the same time. The Auto Configure function of the Robot Controller is now template based. If there is a commonly used robot configuration, a template can be created so that the Auto Configure mechanism can be used to quickly configure a robot of this type. The logic to detect a runaway op mode (both in the LinearOpMode and OpMode types) and to abort the run, then auto recover has been improved/implemented. Fix has been incorporated so that Logitech F310 gamepad mappings will be correct for Marshmallow users. Release 16.07.08 For the ftc_app project, the gradle files have been modified to support Android Studio 2.1.x. Release 16.03.30 For the MIT App Inventor, the design blocks have new icons that better represent the function of each design component. Some changes were made to the shutdown logic to ensure the robust shutdown of some of our USB services. A change was made to LinearOpMode so as to allow a given instance to be executed more than once, which is required for the App Inventor. Javadoc improved/updated. Release 16.03.09 Changes made to make the FTC SDK synchronous (significant change!) waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() are no longer needed and have been deprecated. runOpMode() (for a LinearOpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. loop() (for an OpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. Methods are synchronous. For example, if you call setMode(DcMotorController.RunMode.RESET_ENCODERS) for a motor, the encoder is guaranteed to be reset when the method call is complete. For legacy module (NXT compatible), user no longer has to toggle between read and write modes when reading from or writing to a legacy device. Changes made to enhance reliability/robustness during ESD event. Changes made to make code thread safe. Debug keystore added so that user-generated robot controller APKs will all use the same signed key (to avoid conflicts if a team has multiple developer laptops for example). Firmware version information for Modern Robotics modules are now logged. Changes made to improve USB comm reliability and robustness. Added support for voltage indicator for legacy (NXT-compatible) motor controllers. Changes made to provide auto stop capabilities for op modes. A LinearOpMode class will stop when the statements in runOpMode() are complete. User does not have to push the stop button on the driver station. If an op mode is stopped by the driver station, but there is a run away/uninterruptible thread persisting, the app will log an error message then force itself to crash to stop the runaway thread. Driver Station UI modified to display lowest measured voltage below current voltage (12V battery). Driver Station UI modified to have color background for current voltage (green=good, yellow=caution, red=danger, extremely low voltage). javadoc improved (edits and additional classes). Added app build time to About activity for driver station and robot controller apps. Display local IP addresses on Driver Station About activity. Added I2cDeviceSynchImpl. Added I2cDeviceSync interface. Added seconds() and milliseconds() to ElapsedTime for clarity. Added getCallbackCount() to I2cDevice. Added missing clearI2cPortActionFlag. Added code to create log messages while waiting for LinearOpMode shutdown. Fix so Wifi Direct Config activity will no longer launch multiple times. Added the ability to specify an alternate i2c address in software for the Modern Robotics gyro. Release 16.02.09 Improved battery checker feature so that voltage values get refreshed regularly (every 250 msec) on Driver Station (DS) user interface. Improved software so that Robot Controller (RC) is much more resilient and “self-healing” to USB disconnects: If user attempts to start/restart RC with one or more module missing, it will display a warning but still start up. When running an op mode, if one or more modules gets disconnected, the RC & DS will display warnings,and robot will keep on working in spite of the missing module(s). If a disconnected module gets physically reconnected the RC will auto detect the module and the user will regain control of the recently connected module. Warning messages are more helpful (identifies the type of module that’s missing plus its USB serial number). Code changes to fix the null gamepad reference when users try to reference the gamepads in the init() portion of their op mode. NXT light sensor output is now properly scaled. Note that teams might have to readjust their light threshold values in their op modes. On DS user interface, gamepad icon for a driver will disappear if the matching gamepad is disconnected or if that gamepad gets designated as a different driver. Robot Protocol (ROBOCOL) version number info is displayed in About screen on RC and DS apps. Incorporated a display filter on pairing screen to filter out devices that don’t use the “-“ format. This filter can be turned off to show all WiFi Direct devices. Updated text in License file. Fixed formatting error in OpticalDistanceSensor.toString(). Fixed issue on with a blank (“”) device name that would disrupt WiFi Direct Pairing. Made a change so that the WiFi info and battery info can be displayed more quickly on the DS upon connecting to RC. Improved javadoc generation. Modified code to make it easier to support language localization in the future. Release 16.01.04 Updated compileSdkVersion for apps Prevent Wifi from entering power saving mode removed unused import from driver station Corrrected "Dead zone" joystick code. LED.getDeviceName and .getConnectionInfo() return null apps check for ROBOCOL_VERSION mismatch Fix for Telemetry also has off-by-one errors in its data string sizing / short size limitations error User telemetry output is sorted. added formatting variants to DbgLog and RobotLog APIs code modified to allow for a long list of op mode names. changes to improve thread safety of RobocolDatagramSocket Fix for "missing hardware leaves robot controller disconnected from driver station" error fix for "fast tapping of Init/Start causes problems" (toast is now only instantiated on UI thread). added some log statements for thread life cycle. moved gamepad reset logic inside of initActiveOpMode() for robustness changes made to mitigate risk of race conditions on public methods. changes to try and flag when WiFi Direct name contains non-printable characters. fix to correct race condition between .run() and .close() in ReadWriteRunnableStandard. updated FTDI driver made ReadWriteRunnableStanard interface public. fixed off-by-one errors in Command constructor moved specific hardware implmentations into their own package. moved specific gamepad implemnatations to the hardware library. changed LICENSE file to new BSD version. fixed race condition when shutting down Modern Robotics USB devices. methods in the ColorSensor classes have been synchronized. corrected isBusy() status to reflect end of motion. corrected "back" button keycode. the notSupported() method of the GyroSensor class was changed to protected (it should not be public). Release 15.11.04.001 Added Support for Modern Robotics Gyro. The GyroSensor class now supports the MR Gyro Sensor. Users can access heading data (about Z axis) Users can also access raw gyro data (X, Y, & Z axes). Example MRGyroTest.java op mode included. Improved error messages More descriptive error messages for exceptions in user code. Updated DcMotor API Enable read mode on new address in setI2cAddress Fix so that driver station app resets the gamepads when switching op modes. USB-related code changes to make USB comm more responsive and to display more explicit error messages. Fix so that USB will recover properly if the USB bus returns garbage data. Fix USB initializtion race condition. Better error reporting during FTDI open. More explicit messages during USB failures. Fixed bug so that USB device is closed if event loop teardown method was not called. Fixed timer UI issue Fixed duplicate name UI bug (Legacy Module configuration). Fixed race condition in EventLoopManager. Fix to keep references stable when updating gamepad. For legacy Matrix motor/servo controllers removed necessity of appending "Motor" and "Servo" to controller names. Updated HT color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbLegacyModule class. Updated MR color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbDeviceInterfaceModule class. Correctly handle I2C Address change in all color sensors Updated/cleaned up op modes. Updated comments in LinearI2cAddressChange.java example op mode. Replaced the calls to "setChannelMode" with "setMode" (to match the new of the DcMotor method). Removed K9AutoTime.java op mode. Added MRGyroTest.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Gyro Sensor). Added MRRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Color Sensor). Added HTRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use HT legacy color sensor). Added MatrixControllerDemo.java (demonstrates how to use legacy Matrix controller). Updated javadoc documentation. Updated release .apk files for Robot Controller and Driver Station apps. Release 15.10.06.002 Added support for Legacy Matrix 9.6V motor/servo controller. Cleaned up build.gradle file. Minor UI and bug fixes for driver station and robot controller apps. Throws error if Ultrasonic sensor (NXT) is not configured for legacy module port 4 or 5. Release 15.08.03.001 New user interfaces for FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. An init() method is added to the OpMode class. For this release, init() is triggered right before the start() method. Eventually, the init() method will be triggered when the user presses an "INIT" button on driver station. The init() and loop() methods are now required (i.e., need to be overridden in the user's op mode). The start() and stop() methods are optional. A new LinearOpMode class is introduced. Teams can use the LinearOpMode mode to create a linear (not event driven) program model. Teams can use blocking statements like Thread.sleep() within a linear op mode. The API for the Legacy Module and Core Device Interface Module have been updated. Support for encoders with the Legacy Module is now working. The hardware loop has been updated for better performance.

Skip to content github / docs Code Issues 80 Pull requests 35 Discussions Actions Projects 2 Security Insights Merge branch 'main' into 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table (#1869, Iixixi/ZachryTylerWood#102, THEBOLCK79/docs#1, sbnbhk/docs#1) @martin389 martin389 committed on Dec 9, 2020 2 parents 2f9ec0c + 1588f50 commit 1a56ed136914e522f3a23ecc2be1c49f479a1a6a Showing 501 changed files with 5,397 additions and 1,362 deletions. 2 .github/allowed-actions.js @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ module.exports = [ 'rachmari/labeler@832d42ec5523f3c6d46e8168de71cd54363e3e2e', 'repo-sync/github-sync@3832fe8e2be32372e1b3970bbae8e7079edeec88', 'repo-sync/pull-request@33777245b1aace1a58c87a29c90321aa7a74bd7d', 'rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815', 'someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd', 'tjenkinson/gh-action-auto-merge-dependency-updates@cee2ac0', 'EndBug/add-and-commit@9358097a71ad9fb9e2f9624c6098c89193d83575' ] 72 .github/workflows/confirm-internal-staff-work-in-docs.yml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ name: Confirm internal staff meant to post in public on: issues: types: - opened - reopened - transferred pull_request_target: types: - opened - reopened jobs: check-team-membership: runs-on: ubuntu-latest continue-on-error: true if: github.repository == 'github/docs' steps: - uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | // Only perform this action with GitHub employees try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'employees', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a GitHub employee // If a user is not a GitHub employee, we should stop here and // Not send a notification return } // Don't perform this action with Docs team members try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'docs', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); // If the user is a Docs team member, we should stop here and not send // a notification return } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a Docs team member // If a user is not a Docs team member we should continue and send // the notification } const issueNo = context.number || context.issue.number // Create an issue in our private repo await github.issues.create({ owner: 'github', repo: 'docs-internal', title: `@${context.payload.sender.login} confirm that \#${issueNo} should be in the public github/docs repo`, body: `@${context.payload.sender.login} opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} publicly in the github/docs repo, instead of the private github/docs-internal repo.\n\n@${context.payload.sender.login}, please confirm that this belongs in the public repo and that no sensitive information was disclosed by commenting below and closing the issue.\n\nIf this was not intentional and sensitive information was shared, please delete https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} and notify us in the \#docs-open-source channel.\n\nThanks! \n\n/cc @github/docs @github/docs-engineering` }); throw new Error('A Hubber opened an issue on the public github/docs repo'); - name: Send Slack notification if a GitHub employee who isn't on the docs team opens an issue in public if: ${{ failure() && github.repository == 'github/docs' }} uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_OPEN_SOURCE_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} text: <@${{github.actor}}> opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${{ github.event.number || github.event.issue.number }} publicly on the github/docs repo instead of the private github/docs-internal repo. They have been notified via a new issue in the github/docs-internal repo to confirm this was intentional. 15 .github/workflows/js-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.js", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/js-lint.yml", ".eslint*"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 13 .github/workflows/repo-freeze-reminders.yml @@ -14,11 +14,10 @@ jobs: if: github.repository == 'github/docs-internal' steps: - name: Send Slack notification if repo is frozen uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':freezing_face:' SLACK_COLOR: '#51A0D5' # Carolina Blue SLACK_MESSAGE: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: info text: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! 54 .github/workflows/repo-sync-stalls.yml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ name: Repo Sync Stalls on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/30 * * * *' jobs: check-freezer: name: Check for deployment freezes runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Exit if repo is frozen if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} run: | echo 'The repo is currently frozen! Exiting this workflow.' exit 1 # prevents further steps from running repo-sync-stalls: runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Check if repo sync is stalled uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | let pulls; const owner = context.repo.owner const repo = context.repo.repo try { pulls = await github.pulls.list({ owner: owner, repo: repo, head: `${owner}:repo-sync`, state: 'open' }); } catch(err) { throw err return } pulls.data.forEach(pr => { const timeDelta = Date.now() - Date.parse(pr.created_at); const minutesOpen = timeDelta / 1000 / 60; if (minutesOpen > 30) { core.setFailed('Repo sync appears to be stalled') } }) - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: Repo sync appears to be stalled for ${{github.repository}}. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/pulls?q=is%3Apr+is%3Aopen+repo+sync 16 .github/workflows/repo-sync.yml @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ name: Repo Sync on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/15 * * * *' # every 15 minutes @@ -70,11 +71,10 @@ jobs: number: ${{ steps.find-pull-request.outputs.number }} - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 if: ${{ failure() }} env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':ohno:' SLACK_COLOR: '#B90E0A' # Crimson SLACK_MESSAGE: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 10 .github/workflows/sync-algolia-search-indices.yml @@ -33,8 +33,10 @@ jobs: GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }} run: npm run sync-search - name: Send slack notification if workflow run fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_MESSAGE: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` 15 .github/workflows/yml-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.yml", "**/*.yaml", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/yml-lint.yml"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 4 README.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ If you've found a problem, you can open an issue using a [template](https://gith #### Solve an issue If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a PR using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a pull request using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). #### Join us in discussions @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ There are a few more things to know when you're getting started with this repo: In addition to the README you're reading right now, this repo includes other READMEs that describe the purpose of each subdirectory in more detail: - [content/README.md](content/README.md) - [content/graphql/README.md](content/graphql/README.md) - [content/rest/README.md](content/rest/README.md) - [contributing/README.md](contributing/README.md) - [data/README.md](data/README.md) - [data/reusables/README.md](data/reusables/README.md) BIN +164 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +75.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-ide-go-grant-access-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +175 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-repository-ide-button-in-readme.png Binary file not shown. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assign-deadline.png Binary file not shown. BIN +32.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assignment-title.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-autograding-click-pencil-or-trash.png Binary file not shown. BIN +72 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-choose-repository-visibility.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-continue-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +23.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-create-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-grading-and-feedback.png Binary file not shown. BIN +53.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-new-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +134 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-online-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +77.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.png Binary file not shown. BIN +18.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-review-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-save-test-case-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +121 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-template-repository-in-list.png Binary file not shown. BIN +21.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-update-assignment.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +96.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-test.png Binary file not shown. BIN +71.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-define-teams.png Binary file not shown. BIN +39.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-enable-feedback-pull-requests.png Binary file not shown. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-type-protected-file-paths.png Binary file not shown. BIN +330 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-logs.png Binary file not shown. BIN +187 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-tab.png Binary file not shown. BIN +94.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-grading-method.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-pencil.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-trash.png Diff not rendered. BIN +168 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +154 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-add-students-to-your-roster.png Diff not rendered. BIN +166 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-copy-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +181 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-connection-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +94 KB ...ges/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-disconnect-from-your-lms-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +148 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-lms.png Diff not rendered. BIN +149 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +78.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.8 KB ...images/help/classroom/click-import-from-a-learning-management-system-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-new-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-organization.png Diff not rendered. BIN +28.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-students.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-update-students-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +127 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-modal-with-warning.png Diff not rendered. BIN +264 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-makecode-arcade-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +69.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-replit-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/classroom/lms-github-classroom-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +955 KB assets/images/help/classroom/probot-settings.gif Diff not rendered. BIN +113 KB assets/images/help/classroom/roster-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-click-rename-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github-classroom.png Diff not rendered. BIN +102 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github.png Diff not rendered. BIN +163 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-grant.png Diff not rendered. BIN +324 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button-in-modal.png Diff not rendered. BIN +91.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +174 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-or-upload-student-identifiers.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-archive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-unarchive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/choose-new-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +56.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-and-move-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +65.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +68.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-this-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +353 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-categories.png Diff not rendered. BIN +64.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-new-category-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +98.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-save.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +63.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-mark-as-answer-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-marked-as-answer.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/discussions/customize-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +1.21 MB assets/images/help/discussions/discussons-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +139 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-existing-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/existing-category-click-save-changes-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +680 KB assets/images/help/discussions/hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +307 KB assets/images/help/discussions/most-helpful.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-category-click-create-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +132 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-select-category-dropdown-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +46.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-start-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +108 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-title-and-body-fields.png Diff not rendered. BIN +23.1 KB assets/images/help/discussions/public-repo-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/repository-discussions-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-and-filter-controls.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-result.png Diff not rendered. BIN +35.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/select-discussions-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/setup-discussions-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +95.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/toggle-allow-users-with-read-access-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +73 KB assets/images/help/discussions/unanswered-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +81.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/use-choose-a-repository-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/your-discussions.png Diff not rendered. BIN +563 KB assets/images/help/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-navigate.png Diff not rendered. BIN +150 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +128 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph-job.png Diff not rendered. BIN +135 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph.png Diff not rendered. BIN +5.46 KB assets/images/help/organizations/update-profile-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-rich-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +24.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-source-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +214 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-vulnerability.png Diff not rendered. BIN +105 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/file-filter-menu-json.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB (510%) assets/images/help/pull_requests/pull-request-tabs-changed-files.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-delete-artifact-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +122 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-failed-pester-test-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.4 KB assets/images/help/repository/artifact-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/cancel-check-suite-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +120 KB assets/images/help/repository/copy-link-button-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +77.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/delete-all-logs-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +326 KB assets/images/help/repository/docker-action-workflow-run-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +84.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/download-logs-drop-down-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +170 KB assets/images/help/repository/in-progress-run.png Diff not rendered. BIN +124 KB assets/images/help/repository/javascript-action-workflow-run-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/repository/passing-data-between-jobs-in-a-workflow-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +80.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/rerun-checks-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/search-log-box-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +133 KB assets/images/help/repository/super-linter-workflow-results-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +97.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/superlinter-lint-code-base-job-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN -128 KB assets/images/help/repository/upload-build-test-artifact.png Diff not rendered. BIN +27.5 KB (170%) assets/images/help/repository/view-run-billable-time.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/workflow-run-kebab-horizontal-icon-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.54 KB assets/images/help/settings/appearance-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +39.7 KB assets/images/help/settings/theme-settings-radio-buttons.png Diff not rendered. BIN +11.1 KB assets/images/help/settings/update-theme-preference-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/billing-account-switcher.png Diff not rendered. BIN +6.37 KB (150%) assets/images/help/sponsors/edit-sponsorship-payment-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/link-account-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +12.8 KB (170%) assets/images/help/sponsors/manage-your-sponsorship-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/organization-update-email-textbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +13.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount-link.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.7 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/select-an-account-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +17 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsor-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +15.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +16.1 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-settings-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.91 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/update-checkbox-manage.png Diff not rendered. BIN +43 KB (160%) assets/images/marketplace/marketplace-request-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +53.6 KB assets/images/marketplace/marketplace_verified_creator_badges_apps.png Diff not rendered. 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-docker-container-action.md @@ -226,6 +226,10 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-javascript-action.md @@ -261,9 +261,11 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %}  {% else %}  4 content/actions/guides/about-packaging-with-github-actions.md @@ -25,7 +25,11 @@ Creating a package at the end of a continuous integration workflow can help duri Now, when reviewing a pull request, you'll be able to look at the workflow run and download the artifact that was produced. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} This will let you run the code in the pull request on your machine, which can help with debugging or testing the pull request. 4 content/actions/guides/building-and-testing-powershell.md @@ -60,7 +60,11 @@ jobs: * `run: Test-Path resultsfile.log` - Check whether a file called `resultsfile.log` is present in the repository's root directory. * `Should -Be $true` - Uses Pester to define an expected result. If the result is unexpected, then {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} flags this as a failed test. For example: {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} * `Invoke-Pester Unit.Tests.ps1 -Passthru` - Uses Pester to execute tests defined in a file called `Unit.Tests.ps1`. For example, to perform the same test described above, the `Unit.Tests.ps1` will contain the following: ``` 7 content/actions/guides/storing-workflow-data-as-artifacts.md @@ -108,8 +108,6 @@ jobs: path: output/test/code-coverage.html ```  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Configuring a custom artifact retention period @@ -238,7 +236,12 @@ jobs: echo The result is $value ``` The workflow run will archive any artifacts that it generated. For more information on downloading archived artifacts, see "[Downloading workflow artifacts](/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts)." {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" %} 8 content/actions/index.md @@ -68,18 +68,18 @@ versions: <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Code examples</h2> <div class="pr-lg-3 mb-5 mt-3"> <input class="js-code-example-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> <input class="js-filter-card-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> </div> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'code-example-card' for actionsCodeExamples as example %} </div> <button class="js-code-example-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <div class="js-code-example-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-code-example-filter-value"></strong></h3> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/action_code_examples.yml">Learn how to add a code example {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> 11 content/actions/learn-github-actions/introduction-to-github-actions.md @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ In this diagram, you can see the workflow file you just created and how the {% d ### Viewing the job's activity Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. Once your job has started running, you can {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}see a visualization graph of the run's progress and {% endif %}view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click **Actions**. @@ -213,7 +213,14 @@ Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data  1. Under "Workflow runs", click the name of the run you want to see.  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the job you want to see.  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. View the results of each step.  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. Click on the job name to see the results of each step.  {% else %} 7 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/canceling-a-workflow.md @@ -17,9 +17,14 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. From the list of workflow runs, click the name of the `queued` or `in progress` run that you want to cancel.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, click **Cancel workflow**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} ### Steps {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} takes to cancel a workflow run 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -20,4 +20,8 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click the artifact you want to download. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 1 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/index.md @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% link_in_list /using-the-visualization-graph %}{% endif %} {% link_in_list /viewing-workflow-run-history %} {% link_in_list /using-workflow-run-logs %} {% link_in_list /manually-running-a-workflow %} 3 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/re-running-a-workflow.md @@ -16,5 +16,4 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.{% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% else %}{% endif %} 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/removing-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -27,7 +27,11 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click {% octicon "trashcan" aria-label="The trashcan icon" %} next to the artifact you want to remove. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Setting the retention period for an artifact 23 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-the-visualization-graph.md @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ --- title: Using the visualization graph intro: Every workflow run generates a real-time graph that illustrates the run progress. You can use this graph to monitor and debug workflows. product: '{% data reusables.gated-features.actions %}' versions: free-pro-team: '*' enterprise-server: '>=3.1' --- {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.visualization-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. The graph displays each job in the workflow. An icon to the left of the job name indicates the status of the job. Lines between jobs indicate dependencies.  2. Click on a job to view the job log.  18 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-workflow-run-logs.md @@ -45,7 +45,11 @@ You can search the build logs for a particular step. When you search logs, only {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the log output, in the **Search logs** search box, type a search query. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. To expand each step you want to include in your search, click the step.  @@ -63,8 +67,12 @@ You can download the log files from your workflow run. You can also download a w {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**. 1. In the upper right corner, click {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %}{% else %}{% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}{% endif %} and select **Download log archive**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**.  @@ -80,9 +88,17 @@ You can delete the log files from your workflow run. {% data reusables.repositor {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 2. To delete the log files, click the **Delete all logs** button and review the confirmation prompt. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} After deleting logs, the **Delete all logs** button is removed to indicate that no log files remain in the workflow run. {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. 2 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/viewing-job-execution-time.md @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Billable job execution minutes are only shown for jobs run on private repositori {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view the billable job execution time, click **Run and billable time details**. 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view details about the billable job execution time, click the time under **Billable time**.  {% note %} 5 content/actions/quickstart.md @@ -60,8 +60,13 @@ Committing the workflow file in your repository triggers the `push` event and ru {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% else %} 1. In the left sidebar, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% endif %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-failed-job-results-superlinter %} ### More starter workflows 49 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: About GitHub Marketplace intro: 'Learn the basics to prepare your app for review before joining {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' intro: 'Learn about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} where you can share your apps and actions publicly with all {% data variables.product.product_name %} users.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/ - /marketplace/getting-started @@ -14,52 +14,41 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.actions-not-verified %} To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." ### Apps You can list verified and unverified apps in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps do not go through the security, testing, and verification cycle {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} requires for verified apps. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only listings that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can include paid plans. For more information, see "[About verified creators](/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators)." Verified apps have a green badge in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps have a grey badge next to their listing and are only available as free apps. If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} or {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/developers/apps/building-github-apps)" or "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/developers/apps/building-oauth-apps)."  If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building apps](/apps/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. See "[Differences between GitHub and OAuth apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. To learn more about switching from OAuth to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see [Migrating OAuth Apps to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/). {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. For more information, see "[Differences between {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" and "[Migrating {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/)." If you have questions about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, please contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} directly. #### Unverified Apps Unverified apps do not need to meet the "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)" or go through the "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)". {% data reusables.marketplace.unverified-apps %} Having a published paid plan will prevent you from being able to submit an unverified app. You must remove paid plans or keep them in draft mode before publishing an unverified app. To list your unverified app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you only need to create a "[Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/)" and submit it as an unverified listing. {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} ### Publishing an app to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} #### Verified Apps When you have finished creating your app, you can share it with other users by publishing it to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. In summary, the process is: If you've already built an app and you're interested in submitting a verified listing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, start here: 1. Review your app carefully to ensure that it will behave as expected in other repositories and that it follows best practice guidelines. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)" and "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app#best-practice-for-customer-experience)." 1. [Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)<br/>Learn about requirements, guidelines, and the app submission process. 1. Add webhook events to the app to track user billing requests. For more information about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, webhook events, and billing requests, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." 1. [Integrating with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/)<br/>Before you can list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you'll need to integrate billing flows using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API and webhook events. 1. Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)." 1. [Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/) <br/>Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, configure webhook settings, and set up pricing plans. 1. Add a pricing plan. For more information, see "[Setting pricing plans for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing)." 1. [Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)<br/>Learn about pricing plans, billing cycles, and how to receive payment from {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your app. 1. Check whether your app meets the requirements for listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free or a paid app. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Insights](/marketplace/github-marketplace-insights/)<br/>See how your app is performing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. You can use metrics collected by {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} to guide your marketing campaign and be successful in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. 1. Read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} transactions](/marketplace/github-marketplace-transactions/)<br/>Download and view transaction data for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. 1. Submit your listing for publication in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, requesting verification if you want to sell the app. For more information, see "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication)." ### Reviewing your app An onboarding expert will contact you with any questions or further steps. For example, if you have added a paid plan, you will need to complete the verification process and complete financial onboarding. As soon as your listing is approved the app is published to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. We want to make sure that the apps offered on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are safe, secure, and well tested. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will review your app to ensure that it meets all requirements. Follow the guidelines in these articles before submitting your app: ### Seeing how your app is performing You can access metrics and transactions for your listing. For more information, see: * [Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/) * [Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/) - "[Viewing metrics for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-metrics-for-your-listing)" - "[Viewing transactions for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-transactions-for-your-listing)" 43 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: About verified creators intro: 'Each organization that wants to sell apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must follow a verification process. Their identity is checked and their billing process reviewed.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About verified creators A verified creator is an organization that {% data variables.product.company_short %} has checked. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only organizations that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can sell apps. For more information about organizations, see "[About organizations](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-organizations)." The verification process aims to protect users. For example, it verifies the seller's identity, checks that their {% data variables.product.product_name %} organization is set up securely, and that they can be contacted for support. After passing the verification checks, any apps that the organization lists on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are shown with a verified creator badge {% octicon "verified" aria-label="Verified creator badge" %}. The organization can now add paid plans to any of their apps. Each app with a paid plan also goes through a financial onboarding process to check that it's set up to handle billing correctly.  In addition to the verified creator badge, you'll also see badges for unverified and verified apps. These apps were published using the old method for verifying individual apps.  For information on finding apps to use, see "[Searching {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-github-marketplace)." ### About the verification process The first time you request verification for a listing of one of your apps, you will enter the verification process. An onboarding expert will guide you through the process. This includes checking: - Profile information - The basic profile information is populated accurately and appropriately. - Security - The organization has enabled two-factor authentication. - Verified domain - The organization has verified the domain of the site URL. - Purchase webhook event - The event is handled correctly by the app. When your organization is verified, all your apps are shown with a verified creator badge. You are now able to offer paid plans for any of your apps. For more information about the requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% note %} **Note:** This verification process for apps replaces the previous process where individual apps were verified. The current process is similar to the verification process for actions. If you have apps that were verified under the old process, these will not be affected by the changes. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} team will contact you with details of how to migrate to organization-based verification. {% endnote %} 12 content/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers.md @@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ versions: ### Understanding the billing cycle Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)." Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[Webhook events for the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api)." ### Providing billing services in your app's UI Customers must be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers must be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. Customers should be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers should be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} ### Billing services for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)." Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." You can use the `marketplace_purchase` webhook's `effective_date` key to determine when a plan change will occur and periodically synchronize the [List accounts for a plan](/rest/reference/apps#list-accounts-for-a-plan). @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ When a customer upgrades their pricing plan or changes their billing cycle from {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-failed-purchase-event %} For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)." For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)." #### Downgrades and cancellations @@ -45,4 +45,4 @@ When a customer cancels a plan, you must: {% data reusables.marketplace.cancellation-clarification %} - Enable them to upgrade the plan through GitHub if they would like to continue the plan at a later time. For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." 20 ...nt/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ --- title: Customer experience best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for creating an app that will be easy to use and understand.' shortTitle: Customer experience best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a good customer experience. ### Customer communication - Marketing materials for the app should accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps should include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - Customers should be able to see what type of plan they have in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - Customers should be able to install and use your app on both a personal account and an organization account. They should be able to view and manage the app on those accounts separately. ### Plan management {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app.md @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ Once you've created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} draft li ### Submitting your app Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, an onboarding expert will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." ### Removing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com) to remove your listing. If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} to remove your listing. 2 content/developers/github-marketplace/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ GitHub then sends the [`marketplace_purchase`](/webhooks/event-payloads/#marketp Read the `effective_date` and `marketplace_purchase` object from the `marketplace_purchase` webhook to determine which plan the customer purchased, when the billing cycle starts, and when the next billing cycle begins. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." See "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." See "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. See "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" for an example of the `marketplace_purchase` event payload. 6 content/developers/github-marketplace/index.md @@ -11,8 +11,10 @@ versions: {% topic_link_in_list /creating-apps-for-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-verified-creators %} {% link_in_list /requirements-for-listing-an-app %} {% link_in_list /security-review-process-for-submitted-apps %} {% link_in_list /security-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /viewing-metrics-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /viewing-transactions-for-your-listing %} {% topic_link_in_list /using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app %} @@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ versions: {% link_in_list /writing-a-listing-description-for-your-app %} {% link_in_list /setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /configuring-a-webhook-to-notify-you-of-plan-changes %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-review %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-publication %} {% topic_link_in_list /selling-your-app-on-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps %} {% link_in_list /billing-customers %} 32 content/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps.md @@ -10,35 +10,45 @@ versions: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit, and GitHub lists the price in US dollars. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave GitHub.com. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) for purchase events. {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit. Prices are set, displayed, and processed in US dollars. Paid plans are restricted to verified listings. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle events from the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If the app you're listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} has multiple plan options, you can set up corresponding pricing plans. For example, if your app has two plan options, an open source plan and a pro plan, you can set up a free pricing plan for your open source plan and a flat pricing plan for your pro plan. Each {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing must have an annual and a monthly price for every plan that's listed. For more information on how to create a pricing plan, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% note %} {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} **Note:** If you're listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't list your app with a free pricing plan if you offer a paid service outside of {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. ### Types of pricing plans {% endnote %} #### Free pricing plans ### Types of pricing plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} Free plans are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. All apps need to handle events for new purchases and cancellations. Apps that only have free plans do not need to handle events for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. For more information, see: "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to request verification for the app and go through financial onboarding. #### Paid pricing plans **Free pricing plans** are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. Unverified free apps do not need to implement any billing flows. Free apps that are verified by Github need to implement billing flows for new purchases and cancellations, but do not need to implement billing flows for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to resubmit the app for review. There are two types of paid pricing plan: **Flat rate pricing plans** charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. - Flat rate pricing plans charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. **Per-unit pricing plans** charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). - Per-unit pricing plans charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). **Marketplace free trials** provide 14-day free trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you [set up a Marketplace pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/), you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. You may also want to offer free trials. These provide free, 14-day trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you set up a Marketplace pricing plan, you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. ### Free trials Customers can start a free trial for any available paid plan on a Marketplace listing, but will not be able to create more than one free trial for a Marketplace product. Customers can start a free trial for any paid plan on a Marketplace listing that includes free trials. However, customers cannot create more than one free trial per marketplace product. Free trials have a fixed length of 14 days. Customers are notified 4 days before the end of their trial period (on day 11 of the free trial) that their plan will be upgraded. At the end of a free trial, customers will be auto-enrolled into the plan they are trialing if they do not cancel. See "[New purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)" for details on how to handle free trials in your app. For more information, see: "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/developers/github-marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)." {% note %} 61 content/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Requirements for listing an app intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before our {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will approve the listing.' intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before the listing can be published.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ - /apps/marketplace/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ @@ -12,49 +12,62 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!--UI-LINK: Displayed as a link on the https://github.com/marketplace/new page.--> The requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} vary according to whether you want to offer a free or a paid app. Before you submit your app for review, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." You'll accept the terms within your [draft listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. Once you've submitted your app, one of the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will reach out to you with more information about the onboarding process, and review your app to ensure it meets these requirements: ### Requirements for all {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listings ### User experience All listings on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} should be for tools that provide value to the {% data variables.product.product_name %} community. When you submit your listing for publication, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. #### User experience requirements for all apps All listings should meet the following requirements, regardless of whether they are for a free or paid app. - Listings must not actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Listings must include valid contact information for the publisher. - Listings must have a relevant description of the application. - Listings must specify a pricing plan. - Apps must provide value to customers and integrate with the platform in some way beyond authentication. - Apps must be publicly available in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} and cannot be in beta or available by invite only. - Apps cannot actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Marketing materials for the app must accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps must include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - When a customer purchases an app and GitHub redirects them to the app's installation URL, the app must begin the OAuth flow immediately. For details, see "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/#step-3-authorization)." - Apps must have webhook events set up to notify the publisher of any plan changes or cancellations using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." - Customers must be able to install your app and select repositories on both a personal and organization account. They should be able to view and manage those accounts separately. For more information on providing a good customer experience, see "[Customer experience best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Brand and listing #### Brand and listing requirements for all apps - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the "[{% data variables.product.product_name %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)" guidelines. - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the {% data variables.product.company_short %} guidelines. For more information, see "[{% data variables.product.company_short %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)." - Apps must have a logo, feature card, and screenshots images that meet the recommendations provided in "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." - Listings must include descriptions that are well written and free of grammatical errors. For guidance in writing your listing, see "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." ### Security To protect your customers, we recommend that you also follow security best practices. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Considerations for free apps Apps will go through a security review before being listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. A successful review will meet the requirements and follow the security best practices listed in "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)." For information on the review process, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com). {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} ### Requirements for paid apps In addition to the requirements for all apps above, each app that you offer as a paid service on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must also meet the following requirements: - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. - All paid apps must handle {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events for new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For more information, see "[Billing requirements for paid apps](#billing-requirements-for-paid-apps)" below. - Publishing organizations must have a verified domain and must enable two-factor authentication. For more information, see "[Requiring two-factor authentication in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/requiring-two-factor-authentication-in-your-organization.") ### Billing flows When you are ready to publish the app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} you must request verification for the listing. Your app must integrate [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) using the [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook event](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/). {% note %} #### Free apps The verification process is open to organizations. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} If you are listing a free app, you'll need to meet these requirements: {% endnote %} - Customers must be able to see that they have a free plan in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - When a customer cancels your app, you must follow the flow for [cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/). ### Billing requirements for paid apps #### Paid apps Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For information about how integrate these events into your app, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." To offer your app as a paid service, you'll need to meet these requirements to list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}: Using GitHub's billing API allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and to pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - To sell your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, it must use GitHub's billing system. Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" to learn about how to integrate these events into your app. Using GitHub's billing system allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - Apps must support both monthly and annual billing for paid subscriptions purchases. - Listings may offer any combination of free and paid plans. Free plans are optional but encouraged. For more information, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 60 content/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ --- title: Security best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for preparing a secure app to share on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/ - /marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process - /developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps shortTitle: Security best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a secure user experience. ### Authorization, authentication, and access control We recommend creating a GitHub App rather than an OAuth App. {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}. See "[Differences between GitHub Apps and OAuth Apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. - Apps should use the principle of least privilege and should only request the OAuth scopes and GitHub App permissions that the app needs to perform its intended functionality. For more information, see [Principle of least privilege](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle_of_least_privilege) in Wikipedia. - Apps should provide customers with a way to delete their account, without having to email or call a support person. - Apps should not share tokens between different implementations of the app. For example, a desktop app should have a separate token from a web-based app. Individual tokens allow each app to request the access needed for GitHub resources separately. - Design your app with different user roles, depending on the functionality needed by each type of user. For example, a standard user should not have access to admin functionality, and billing managers might not need push access to repository code. - Apps should not share service accounts such as email or database services to manage your SaaS service. - All services used in your app should have unique login and password credentials. - Admin privilege access to the production hosting infrastructure should only be given to engineers and employees with administrative duties. - Apps should not use personal access tokens to authenticate and should authenticate as an [OAuth App](/apps/about-apps/#about-oauth-apps) or a [GitHub App](/apps/about-apps/#about-github-apps): - OAuth Apps should authenticate using an [OAuth token](/apps/building-oauth-apps/authorizing-oauth-apps/). - GitHub Apps should authenticate using either a [JSON Web Token (JWT)](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-a-github-app), [OAuth token](/apps/building-github-apps/identifying-and-authorizing-users-for-github-apps/), or [installation access token](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-an-installation). ### Data protection - Apps should encrypt data transferred over the public internet using HTTPS, with a valid TLS certificate, or SSH for Git. - Apps should store client ID and client secret keys securely. We recommend storing them as [environmental variables](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environment_variable#Getting_and_setting_environment_variables). - Apps should delete all GitHub user data within 30 days of receiving a request from the user, or within 30 days of the end of the user's legal relationship with GitHub. - Apps should not require the user to provide their GitHub password. - Apps should encrypt tokens, client IDs, and client secrets. ### Logging and monitoring Apps should have logging and monitoring capabilities. App logs should be retained for at least 30 days and archived for at least one year. A security log should include: - Authentication and authorization events - Service configuration changes - Object reads and writes - All user and group permission changes - Elevation of role to admin - Consistent timestamping for each event - Source users, IP addresses, and/or hostnames for all logged actions ### Incident response workflow To provide a secure experience for users, you should have a clear incident response plan in place before listing your app. We recommend having a security and operations incident response team in your company rather than using a third-party vendor. You should have the capability to notify {% data variables.product.product_name %} within 24 hours of a confirmed incident. For an example of an incident response workflow, see the "Data Breach Response Policy" on the [SANS Institute website](https://www.sans.org/information-security-policy/). A short document with clear steps to take in the event of an incident is more valuable than a lengthy policy template. ### Vulnerability management and patching workflow You should conduct regular vulnerability scans of production infrastructure. You should triage the results of vulnerability scans and define a period of time in which you agree to remediate the vulnerability. If you are not ready to set up a full vulnerability management program, it's useful to start by creating a patching process. For guidance in creating a patch management policy, see this TechRepublic article "[Establish a patch management policy](https://www.techrepublic.com/blog/it-security/establish-a-patch-management-policy-87756/)." 94 ...ent/developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps.md This file was deleted. 53 content/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting pricing plans for your listing intro: 'When [listing your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/), you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' intro: 'When you list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ - /apps/marketplace/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ @@ -17,57 +17,52 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About setting pricing plans If you want to sell an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you need to request verification when you publish the listing for your app. During the verification process, an onboarding expert checks the organization's identity and security settings. The onboarding expert will also take the organization through financial onboarding. For more information, see: "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." ### Creating pricing plans To learn about the types of pricing plans that {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Pricing Plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." You'll also find helpful billing guidelines in "[Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)." Pricing plans can be in the draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published listing will function the same way as draft listings until your app is approved and listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft listings allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish the pricing plan, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). If you haven't created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing yet, read "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)" to learn how. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers several different types of pricing plan. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)." #### Plan name ### About saving pricing plans Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align to the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. You can save pricing plans in a draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published plan will function in the same way as a draft plan until your listing is approved and shown on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft plans allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish a pricing plan on a published listing, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. #### Pricing models For guidelines on billing customers, see "[Billing customers](/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers)." ##### Free plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} A free plan still requires you to handle [new purchase](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/) and [cancellation](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/) billing flows. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" for more details. ##### Flat-rate plans ### Creating pricing plans Flat-rate pricing plans allow you to offer your service to customers for a flat-rate fee. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). For more information, see "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)." You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in U.S. Dollars for flat-rate plans. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: ##### Per-unit plans - **Plan name** - Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align with the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. Per-unit pricing allows you to offer your app in units. For example, a unit can be a person, seat, or user. You'll need to provide a name for the unit and set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions, in U.S. Dollars. - **Pricing models** - There are three types of pricing plan: free, flat-rate, and per-unit. All plans require you to process new purchase and cancellation events from the marketplace API. In addition, for paid plans: #### Available for - You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in US dollars. - Your app must process plan change events. - You must request verification to publish a listing with a paid plan. - {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} apps](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Short description - **Available for** - {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. - **Short description** - Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. #### Bullets - **Bullets** - You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} ### Changing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plan is no longer needed or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it. If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing is no longer needed, or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it.  Once you publish a pricing plan for an app already listed in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you publish a pricing plan for an app that is already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan and create a new plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you remove a pricing plan, users won't be able to purchase your app using that plan. Existing users on the removed pricing plan will continue to stay on the plan until they cancel their plan subscription. 37 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication.md @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ --- title: Submitting your listing for publication intro: 'You can submit your listing for the {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} community to use.' redirect_from: - /marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review - /developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- Once you've completed the listing for your app, you'll see two buttons that allow you to request publication of the listing with or without verification. The **Request** button for "Publish without verification" is disabled if you have published any paid pricing plans in the listing.  {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} After you submit your listing for review, an onboarding expert will reach out to you with additional information. For an overview of the process for creating and submitting a listing, see "[About {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace#publishing-an-app-to-github-marketplace)." ### Prerequisites for publishing with verification Before you request verification of your listing, you'll need to integrate the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} billing flows and webhook into your app. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you've met the requirements for listing and you've integrated with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, go ahead and submit your listing. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Transferring an app to an organization before you submit](#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)" below. ### Transferring an app to an organization before you submit You cannot sell an app that's owned by a user account. You need to transfer the app to an organization that is already a verified creator, or that can request verification for a listing for the app. For details, see: 1. "[Creating an organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)" 1. "[Transferring ownership of a GitHub App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-a-github-app)" or "[Transferring ownership of an OAuth App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-an-oauth-app)" 22 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review.md This file was deleted. 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/testing-your-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Testing your app intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team approves your app, it must adequately handle the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows).' intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before an onboarding expert approves your app, it must adequately handle the billing flows.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/testing-apps-apis-and-webhooks/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/testing-github-marketplace-apps/ @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ versions: ### Testing apps You can use a [draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) to simulate each of the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows). A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. You can use a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing to simulate each of the billing flows. A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Using a development app with a draft listing to test changes 2 .../developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Webhook events for the GitHub Marketplace API intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan. For details on how to respond to each of these types of events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)."' intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/setting-up-github-marketplace-webhooks/about-webhook-payloads-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/ 4 content/developers/webhooks-and-events/webhook-events-and-payloads.md @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_repositories_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example 54 ...ssions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ --- title: About discussions intro: Use discussions to ask and answer questions, share information, make announcements, and conduct or participate in a conversation about a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About discussions With {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, the community for your project can create and participate in conversations within the project's repository. Discussions empower a project's maintainers, contributors, and visitors to gather and accomplish the following goals in a central location, without third-party tools. - Share announcements and information, gather feedback, plan, and make decisions - Ask questions, discuss and answer the questions, and mark the discussions as answered - Foster an inviting atmosphere for visitors and contributors to discuss goals, development, administration, and workflows  You don't need to close a discussion like you close an issue or a pull request. If a repository administrator or project maintainer enables discussions for a repository, anyone who visits the repository can create and participate in discussions for the repository. Repository administrators and project maintainers can manage discussions and discussion categories in a repository, and pin discussions to increase the visibility of the discussion. Moderators and collaborators can mark comments as answers, lock discussions, and convert issues to discussions. For more information, see "[Repository permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." For more information about management of discussions for your repository, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### About categories and formats for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-categorize-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} {% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For discussions with a question/answer format, an individual comment within the discussion can be marked as the discussion's answer. {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### Best practices for discussions As a community member or maintainer, start a discussion to ask a question or discuss information that affects the community. For more information, see "[Collaborating with maintainers using discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions)." Participate in a discussion to ask and answer questions, provide feedback, and engage with the project's community. For more information, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." You can spotlight discussions that contain important, useful, or exemplary conversations among members in the community. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Sharing feedback You can share your feedback about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} with {% data variables.product.company_short %}. To join the conversation, see [`github/feedback`](https://github.com/github/feedback/discussions?discussions_q=category%3A%22Discussions+Feedback%22). ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About notifications](/github/managing-subscriptions-and-notifications-on-github/about-notifications)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 50 ...community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ --- title: Collaborating with maintainers using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating with maintainers intro: You can contribute to the goals, plans, health, and community for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %} by communicating with the maintainers of the project in a discussion. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can start and participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About collaboration with maintainers using discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you use or contribute to a project, you can start a discussion to make suggestions and engage with maintainers and community members about your plans, questions, ideas, and feedback. For more information, see "[‎About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Repository administrators and project maintainers can delete a discussion. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#deleting-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} These members appear in a list of the most helpful contributors to the project's discussions. As your project grows, you can grant higher access permissions to active members of your community. For more information, see "[Granting higher permissions to top contributors](/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors)"  For more information about participation in discussions, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." ### Prerequisites To collaborate with maintainers using discussions, a repository administrator or project maintainer must enable discussions for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Starting a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Filtering the list of discussions You can search for discussions and filter the list of discussions in a repository. For more information, see "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the **Search all discussions** field, type a search query. Optionally, to the right of the search field, click a button to further filter the results.  1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to view.  ### Converting an issue to a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 14 content/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ --- title: Collaborating with your community using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating using discussions intro: Gather and discuss your project with community members and other maintainers. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /participating-in-a-discussion %} {% link_in_list /collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions %} 31 ...borating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: Participating in a discussion intro: You can converse with the community and maintainers in a forum within the repository for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About participation in a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." In addition to starting or viewing a discussion, you can comment in response to the original comment from the author of the discussion. You can also create a comment thread by replying to an individual comment that another community member made within the discussion, and react to comments with emoji. For more information about reactions, see "[About conversations on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-conversations-on-github#reacting-to-ideas-in-comments)." You can block users and report disruptive content to maintain a safe and pleasant environment for yourself on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. For more information, see "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)." ### Prerequisites Discussions must be enabled for the repository for you to participate in a discussion in the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Creating a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Marking a comment as an answer Discussion authors and users with the triage role or greater for a repository can mark a comment as the answer to a discussion in the repository. {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} 49 content/discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github.md @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ --- title: Best practices for community conversations on GitHub shortTitle: Best practices for community conversations intro: 'You can use discussions to brainstorm with your team, and eventually move the conversation to a discussion when you are ready to scope out the work.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Community conversations in {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} Since {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is an open forum, there is an opportunity to bring non-code collaboration into a project's repository and gather diverse feedback and ideas more quickly. You can help drive a productive conversation by: - Asking pointed questions and follow-up questions to garner specific feedback - Capture a diverse experience and distill it down to main points - Open an issue to take action based on the conversation, where applicable For more information about opening an issue and cross-referencing a discussion, see "[Opening an issue from a comment](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-a-comment)." ### Learning about conversations on GitHub You can create and participate in discussions, issues, and pull requests, depending on the type of conversation you'd like to have. You can use {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} to discuss big picture ideas, brainstorm, and spike out a project's specific details before committing it to an issue, which can then be scoped. Discussions are useful for teams if: - You are in the discovery phase of a project and are still learning which director your team wants to go in - You want to collect feedback from a wider community about a project - You want to keep bug fixes, feature requests, and general conversations separate Issues are useful for discussing specific details of a project such as bug reports and planned improvements. For more information, see "[About issues](/articles/about-issues)." Pull requests allow you to comment directly on proposed changes. For more information, see "[About pull requests](/articles/about-pull-requests)" and "[Commenting on a pull request](/articles/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." {% data reusables.organizations.team-discussions-purpose %} For more information, see "[About team discussions](/articles/about-team-discussions)." ### Following contributing guidelines Before you open a discussion, check to see if the repository has contributing guidelines. The CONTRIBUTING file includes information about how the repository maintainer would like you to contribute ideas to the project. For more information, see "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Next steps To continue learning about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} and quickly create a discussion for your community, see "[Quickstart for {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}](/discussions/quickstart)." ### Further reading - "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/articles/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)" - "[Using templates to encourage useful issues and pull requests](/github/building-a-strong-community/using-templates-to-encourage-useful-issues-and-pull-requests)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/articles/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Writing on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/articles/writing-on-github)" 21 content/discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ --- title: Finding discussions across multiple repositories intro: 'You can easily access every discussion you''ve created or participated in across multiple repositories.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Finding discussions 1. Navigate to {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. 1. In the top-right corner of {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}, click your profile photo, then click **Your enterprises**.  1. Toggle between **Created** and **Commented** to see the discussions you've created or participated in. ### Further reading - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)" - "[Managing discussions for your community](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community)" 32 content/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Granting higher permissions to top contributors intro: 'Repository administrators can promote any community member to a moderator and maintainer.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction The most helpful contributors for the past 30 days are highlighted on the {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} dashboard, based on how many comments were marked as answers by other community members. Helpful contributors can help drive a healthy community and moderate and guide the community space in addition to maintainers. ### Step 1: Audit your discussions top contributors {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. Compare the list of contributors with their access permissions to see who qualifies to moderate the discussion. ### Step 2: Review permission levels for discussions People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." For more information about repository permission levels and {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, see "[Repository permissions levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." ### Step 3: Change permissions levels for top contributors You can change a contributor's permission levels to give them more access to the tooling they need to moderate GitHub Discussions. To change a person's or team's permission levels, see "[Managing teams and people with access to your repository](/github/administering-a-repository/managing-teams-and-people-with-access-to-your-repository)." ### Step 4: Notify community members of elevated access When you change a collaborators permission level, they will receive a notification for the change. 29 content/discussions/guides/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ --- title: Discussions guides shortTitle: Guides intro: 'Discover pathways to get started or learn best practices for participating or monitoring your community''s discussions.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Getting started with discussions {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github %} {% link_in_list /finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories %} <!-- {% link_in_list /managing-notifications-for-discussions %} --> ### Administering discussions {% link_in_list /granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors %} <!--<!-- Commenting out what is only nice to have for discussions release {% link_in_list /updating-your-contributing-guidelines-with-discussions %} --> <!-- ### Discussions and open source projects {% link_in_list /collaborating-on-open-source-projects-in-discussions %} {% link_in_list /welcoming-contributions-to-your-communitys-discussions %} --> 55 content/discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ --- title: GitHub Discussions Documentation beta_product: true shortTitle: GitHub Discussions intro: '{% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Community members can ask and answer questions, share updates, have open-ended conversations, and follow along on decisions affecting the community''s way of working.' introLinks: quickstart: /discussions/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions gettingStarted: - /discussions/quickstart guideCards: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions popular: - /discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors - /discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github - /discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository product_video: https://www.youtube-nocookie.com/embed/DbTWBP3_RbM layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /quickstart %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /discussions-guides %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /managing-discussions-for-your-community %} --> <!-- Community examples --> {% assign discussionsCommunityExamples = site.data.variables.discussions_community_examples %} {% if discussionsCommunityExamples %} <div class="my-6 pt-6"> <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Communities using discussions</h2> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'discussions-community-card' for discussionsCommunityExamples as example %} </div> {% if discussionsCommunityExamples.length > 6 %} <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> {% endif %} <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml">Add your community {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> </div> {% endif %} 13 content/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ --- title: Managing discussions for your community shortTitle: Managing discussions intro: 'You can enable and configure discussions for your repository, and you can use tools on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to moderate conversations among community members.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /managing-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /moderating-discussions %} 64 ...ns-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ --- title: Managing categories for discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize the discussions in your repository to organize conversations for your community members, and you can choose a format for each category. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can enable discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About categories for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Each category must have a unique name and emoji pairing, and can be accompanied by a detailed description stating its purpose. Categories help maintainers organize how conversations are filed and are customizable to help distinguish categories that are Q&A or more open-ended conversations.{% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)." ### Default categories | Category | Purpose | Type | | :- | :- | :- | | #️⃣ General | Anything and everything relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | |💡Ideas | Ideas to change or improve the project | Open-ended discussion | | 🙏 Q&A | Questions for the community to answer, with a question/answer format | Question and Answer | | 🙌 Show and tell | Creations, experiments, or tests relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | ### Creating a category {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.edit-categories %} 1. Click **New category**.  1. Edit the emoji, title, description, and discussion format for the category. For more information about discussion formats, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)."  1. Click **Create**.  ### Editing a category You can edit a category to change the category's emoji, title, description, and discussion format. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %}.  1. {% data reusables.discussions.edit-category-details %}  1. Click **Save changes**.  ### Deleting a category When you delete a category, {% data variables.product.product_name %} will move all discussions in the deleted category to an existing category that you choose. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash icon" %}.  1. Use the drop-down menu, and choose a new category for any discussions in the category you're deleting.  1. Click **Delete & Move**.  108 ...aging-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ --- title: Managing discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize, spotlight, transfer, or delete the discussions in a repository. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can manage discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About management of discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information about discussions, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." Organization owners can choose the permissions required to create a discussion for repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussion creation for repositories in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization)." As a discussions maintainer, you can create community resources to encourage discussions that are aligned with the overall project goal and maintain a friendly open forum for collaborators. Creating a code of conduct or contribution guidelines for collaborators to follow will help facilitate a collaborative and productive forum. For more information on creating community resources, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)," and "[Setting guidelines for repository contributors](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-guidelines-for-repository-contributors)." For more information on facilitating a healthy discussion, see "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)." ### Prerequisites To manage discussions in a repository, discussions must be enabled for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Changing the category for a discussion You can categorize discussions to help community members find related discussions. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" article. You can also move a discussion to a different category. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  ### Pinning a discussion You can pin up to four important discussions above the list of discussions for the repository. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Pin discussion**.  1. Optionally, customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Editing a pinned discussion Editing a pinned discussion will not change the discussion's category. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  1. Customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Unpinning a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Unpin discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Unpin discussion**.  ### Transferring a discussion To transfer a discussion, you must have permissions to create discussions in the repository where you want to transfer the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "arrow-right" aria-label="The right arrow icon" %} **Transfer discussion**.  1. Select the **Choose a repository** drop-down, and click the repository you want to transfer the discussion to.  1. Click **Transfer discussion**.  ### Deleting a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash arrow icon" %} **Delete discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Delete this discussion**.  ### Converting issues based on labels You can convert all issues with the same label to discussions in bulk. Future issues with this label will also automatically convert to the discussion and category you configure. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} {% data reusables.project-management.labels %} 1. Next to the label you want to convert to issues, click **Convert issues**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 40 ...t/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ --- title: Moderating discussions intro: 'You can promote healthy collaboration by marking comments as answers, locking or unlocking discussions, and converting issues to discussions. and editing or deleting comments, discussions, and categories that don''t align with your community''s code of conduct to discussions.' permissions: People with triage access to a repository can moderate discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About moderating discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you have triage permissions for a repository, you can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. ### Marking a comment as an answer {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} ### Locking discussions It's appropriate to lock a conversation when the entire conversation is not constructive or violates your community's code of conduct or {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}'s [Community Guidelines](/github/site-policy/github-community-guidelines). You can also lock a conversation to prevent comments on a discussion you want to use as an announcement to the community. When you lock a conversation, people with write access to the repository will still be able to comment on the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to lock.  1. In the right margin of a discussion, click **Lock conversation**. 1. Read the information about locking conversations and click **Lock conversation on this discussion**. 1. When you're ready to unlock the conversation, click **Unlock conversation**, then click **Unlock conversation on this discussion**. ### Converting an issue to a discussion When you convert an issue to a discussion, the discussion is automatically created using the content from the issue. People with write access to a repository can bulk convert issues based on labels. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} 1. In the list of issues, click the issue you'd like to convert. 1. In the right margin of an issue, click **Convert to discussion**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 62 content/discussions/quickstart.md @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ --- title: Quickstart for GitHub Discussions intro: 'Enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on an existing repository and start conversations with your community.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Discussions are for conversations that need to be transparent and accessible but do not need to be tracked on a project board and are not related to code, unlike issues. Discussions enable fluid, open conversation in a public forum. Discussions give a space for more collaborative conversations by connecting and giving a more centralized area to connect and find information. ### Enabling {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on your repository Repository owners and people with write access can enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} for a community on their public repositories. When you first enable a {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, you will be invited to configure a welcome post. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click {% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %} **Settings**.  1. Under "Features", click **Set up discussions**.  1. Under "Start a new discussion," edit the template to align with the resources and tone you want to set for your community. 1. Click **Start discussion**.  ### Welcoming contributions to your discussions You can welcome your community and introduce a new way to communicate in a repository by creating a welcome post and pin the post to your {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} page. Pinning and locking discussions helps people know that a post is meant as an announcement. You can use announcements as a way to link people to more resources and offer guidance for opening discussions in your community. For more information about pinning a discussion, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." ### Setting up community guidelines for contributors You can set contributing guidelines to encourage collaborators to have meaningful, useful conversations that are relevant to the repository. You can also update the repository's README to communicate expectations on when collaborators should open an issue or discussion. For more information about providing guidelines for your project, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)" and "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Creating a new discussion Anyone with access to a repository can create a discussion. {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Organizing discussions into relevant categories Repository owners and people with write access can create new categories to keep discussions organized. Collaborators participating and creating new discussions can group discussions into the most relevant existing categories. Discussions can also be recategorized after they are created. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" ### Promoting healthy conversations People with write permissions for a repository can help surface important conversations by pinning discussions, deleting discussions that are no longer useful or are damaging to the community, and transferring discussions to more relevant repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." ### Next steps Once there is a clear path to scope work out and move an idea from concept to reality, you can create an issue and start tracking your progress. For more information on creating an issue from a discussion, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." 45 content/education/guides.md @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ --- title: Guides for GitHub Education intro: 'These guides for {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} help you teach and learn both {% data variables.product.product_name %} and software development.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Get started with {% data variables.product.product_name %} Teachers, students, and researchers can use tools from {% data variables.product.product_name %} to enrich a software development curriculum and develop real-world collaboration skills. - [Sign up for a new {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} account](/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account) - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} quickstart ](/github/getting-started-with-github/quickstart) - [Apply for an educator or researcher discount](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount) - [Apply for a student developer pack](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack) ### Run a software development course with {% data variables.product.company_short %} Administer a classroom, assign and review work from your students, and teach the new generation of software developers with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - [Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} ](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom) - [Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms) - [Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment) - [Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment) - [Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository) - [Leave feedback with pull requests](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests) - [Use autograding](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding) ### Learn to develop software Incorporate {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} into your education, and use the same tools as the professionals. - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} learning resources](/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources) - [Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your schoolwork](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_desktop %}](/desktop) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_cli %}](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli) ### Contribute to the community Participate in the community, get training from {% data variables.product.company_short %}, and learn or teach new skills. - [{% data variables.product.prodname_education_community %}](https://education.github.community) - [About Campus Experts](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-experts) - [About Campus Advisors](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-advisors) 43 content/education/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: GitHub Education Documentation shortTitle: Education intro: "{% data variables.product.prodname_education %} helps you teach or learn software development with the tools and support of {% data variables.product.company_short %}'s platform and community." introLinks: quickstart: /education/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-at-your-educational-institution guideCards: - /github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account - /github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom popular: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research - /desktop - /github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom changelog: - title: 'Try something new at Local Hack Day: Learn' date: '2020-10-15' href: https://github.blog/2020-10-15-try-something-new-at-local-hack-day-learn/ - title: 'Remote Education: Creating community through shared experiences' date: '2020-09-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-24-remote-education-creating-community-through-shared-experiences/ - title: 'Remote Education: A series of best practices for online campus communities' date: '2020-09-10' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-10-remote-education-a-series-of-best-practices-for-online-campus-communities/ - title: Welcome to the inaugural class of MLH Fellows date: '2020-06-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-06-24-welcome-to-the-inaugural-class-of-mlh-fellows/ layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /teach-and-learn-with-github-education %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /manage-coursework-with-github-classroom %} --> 31 ...work-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: About using MakeCode Arcade with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using MakeCode Arcade intro: You can configure MakeCode Arcade as the online IDE for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-makecode --- ### About MakeCode Arcade MakeCode Arcade is an online integrated development environment (IDE) for developing retro arcade games using drag-and-drop block programming and JavaScript. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with MakeCode Arcade. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit MakeCode Arcade, the student must sign into MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on MakeCode Arcade. For more information about working on MakeCode Arcade, see the [MakeCode Arcade Tour](https://arcade.makecode.com/ide-tour) and [documentation](https://arcade.makecode.com/docs) on the MakeCode Arcade website. MakeCode Arcade does not support multiplayer-editing for group assignments. Instead, students can collaborate with Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %} features like branches and pull requests. ### About submission of assignments with MakeCode Arcade By default, MakeCode Arcade is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with MakeCode Arcade, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the {% octicon "mark-github" aria-label="The GitHub mark" %}{% octicon "arrow-up" aria-label="The up arrow icon" %} button at the bottom of the screen.  ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...ge-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using Repl.it intro: You can configure Repl.it as the online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-replit --- ### About Repl.it Repl.it is an online integrated development environment (IDE) that supports multiple programming languages. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with Repl.it. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit Repl.it, the student must sign into Repl.it with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on Repl.it. For more information about working on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it Quickstart Guide](https://docs.repl.it/misc/quick-start#the-repl-environment). For group assignments, students can use Repl.it Multiplayer to work collaboratively. For more information, see the [Repl.it Multiplayer](https://repl.it/site/multiplayer) website. ### About submission of assignments with Repl.it By default, Repl.it is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with Repl.it, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the version control functionality in the left sidebar.  For more information about using Git on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it + Git Tutorial](https://repl.it/talk/learn/Replit-Git-Tutorial/23331) on the Repl.it website. ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...anage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Basics of setting up GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} basics' intro: Learn how to set up your classroom, manage assignments, and configure time-saving automation. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Videos about {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} You can watch a series of short video tutorials about the configuration and use of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. To watch all videos as part of a continuous playlist, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} Getting Started Guide](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLIRjfNq867bewk3ZGV6Z7a16YDNRCpK3u) on YouTube. For more information about terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Glossary](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary)". 1. <a href="https://youtu.be/xVVeqIDgCvM" target="_blank">Getting started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 2. <a href="https://youtu.be/DTzrKduaHj8" target="_blank">Adding your student roster</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 3. Creating assignments - <a href="https://youtu.be/6QzKZ63KLss" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using a {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} repository</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/Qmwh6ijsQJU" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Microsoft MakeCode as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/p_g5sQ7hUis" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Repl.it as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 4. <a href="https://youtu.be/ObaFRGp_Eko" target="_blank">How students complete assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 5. <a href="https://youtu.be/g45OJn3UyCU" target="_blank">How teachers review assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 6. <a href="https://youtu.be/QxrA3taZdNM" target="_blank">Creating group assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 7. <a href="https://youtu.be/tJK2cmoh1KM" target="_blank">Next steps to get started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 8. <a href="https://youtu.be/X87v3SFQxLU" target="_blank">{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} Teacher Toolbox</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} ### Next steps For more information about teaching with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Teach with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom)." ### Further reading - "[Teach and learn with {% data variables.product.prodname_education %}](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education)" 51 ...with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ --- title: Configure default settings for assignment repositories shortTitle: Configure defaults for assignment repositories intro: You can use the Probot Settings app to configure the default settings for repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates for an assignment. permissions: Organization owners can configure default settings for assignment repositories by installing a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for the organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/probot-settings --- ### About configuration of defaults for assignment repositories {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates a repository that belongs for each student or team that accepts an assignment. The repository belongs to the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Assignment repositories can be empty, or you can use a template repository. For more information, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} With the Probot Settings app, you can create a file named _.github/settings.yml_ in a repository that contains a list of settings for the repository, and then install a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for your organization that automatically applies the settings to the repository. You can include _.github/settings.yml_ in a template repository that you use for an assignment in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When an individual or team accepts the assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates the assignment repository, and the Settings app automatically applies the settings from _.github/settings.yml_. Probot is a a project, framework, and collection of free apps to automate {% data variables.product.product_name %}. A Probot app can listen to repository events, like the creation of new commits, comments, and issues, and automatically respond to the event. For more information, see the [Probot website](https://probot.github.io) and the [Settings app website](https://probot.github.io/apps/settings/). For more information about {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see "[About apps](/developers/apps/about-apps)." ### Adding the Settings app to your organization After you install the Probot Settings app for your organization, the app will apply the settings that you define in _.github/settings.yml_ for any repository in your organization, including new assignment repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates. 1. Navigate to the [Settings app page](https://github.com/apps/settings). 1. Click **Install**, then click the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Provide the app full access to all repositories owned by the organization.  ### Configuring default settings for an assignment repository 1. Create a template repository that contains a _.github/settings.yml_ file. For a complete list of settings, see the [README](https://github.com/probot/settings#github-settings) for the `probot/settings` repository. For more information about using a template repository for starter code in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% warning %} **Warning:** Do not define `collaborators` in the _.github/settings.yml_ file for your template repository. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} automatically grants teachers and teaching assistants access to assignment repositories. {% endwarning %} 1. Create an assignment using the template repository containing _.github/settings.yml_ as the starter code. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} The Probot Settings app for your organization will now apply the settings you define in _.github/settings.yml_ within the template repository to every assignment repository that {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} creates for a student or team. ### Further reading - [Probot apps](https://probot.github.io/apps/) - [Probot documentation](https://probot.github.io/docs/) 142 ...th-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ --- title: Connect a learning management system to GitHub Classroom intro: You can configure an LTI-compliant learning management system (LMS) to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} so that you can import a roster for your classroom. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configuring-a-learning-management-system-for-github-classroom - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-to-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/generate-lms-credentials - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-canvas - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-generic-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-moodle --- ### About configuration of your LMS You can connect a learning management system (LMS) to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} can import a roster of student identifiers from the LMS. To connect your LMS to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must enter configuration credentials for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} in your LMS. ### Prerequisites To configure an LMS to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must first create a classroom. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-classroom)." ### Supported LMSes {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports import of roster data from LMSes that implement Learning Tools Interoperability (LTI) standards. - LTI version 1.0 and/or 1.1 - LTI Names and Roles Provisioning 1.X Using LTI helps keep your information safe and secure. LTI is an industry-standard protocol and GitHub Classroom's use of LTI is certified by the Instructional Management System (IMS) Global Learning Consortium. For more information, see [Learning Tools Interoperability](https://www.imsglobal.org/activity/learning-tools-interoperability) and [About IMS Global Learning Consortium](http://www.imsglobal.org/aboutims.html) on the IMS Global Learning Consortium website. {% data variables.product.company_short %} has tested import of roster data from the following LMSes into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Canvas - Google Classroom - Moodle - Sakai Currently, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} doesn't support import of roster data from Blackboard or Brightspace ### Generating configuration credentials for your classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. If your classroom already has a roster, you can either update the roster or delete the roster and create a new roster. - For more information about deleting and creating a roster, see "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)" and "[Creating a roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." - For more information about updating a roster, see "[Adding students to the roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)." 1. In the list of LMSes, click your LMS. If your LMS is not supported, click **Other LMS**.  1. Read about connecting your LMS, then click **Connect to _LMS_**. 1. Copy the "Consumer Key", "Shared Secret", and "Launch URL" for the connection to the classroom.  ### Configuring a generic LMS You must configure the privacy settings for your LMS to allow external tools to receive roster information. 1. Navigate to your LMS. 1. Configure an external tool. 1. Provide the configuration credentials you generated in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Consumer key - Shared secret - Launch URL (sometimes called "tool URL" or similar) ### Configuring Canvas You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an external app for Canvas to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Canvas, see the [Canvas website](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/). 1. Sign into [Canvas](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/#login). 1. Select the Canvas course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Settings**. 1. Click the **Apps** tab. 1. Click **View app configurations**. 1. Click **+App**. 1. Select the **Configuration Type** drop-down menu, and click **By URL**. 1. Paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Canvas app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Consumer Key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared Secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service** | Enabled | | **Configuration URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | {% note %} **Note**: If you don't see a checkbox in Canvas labeled "Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service", then your Canvas administrator must contact Canvas support to enable membership service configuration for your Canvas account. Without enabling this feature, you won't be able to sync the roster from Canvas. For more information, see [How do I contact Canvas Support?](https://community.canvaslms.com/t5/Canvas-Basics-Guide/How-do-I-contact-Canvas-Support/ta-p/389767) on the Canvas website. {% endnote %} 1. Click **Submit**. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Home**. 1. To prompt Canvas to send a confirmation email, in the left sidebar, click **GitHub Classroom**. Follow the instructions in the email to finish linking {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. ### Configuring Moodle You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an activity for Moodle to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Moodle, see the [Moodle website](https://moodle.org). You must be using Moodle version 3.0 or greater. 1. Sign into [Moodle](https://moodle.org/login/index.php). 1. Select the Moodle course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. Click **Turn editing on**. 1. Wherever you'd like {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to be available in Moodle, click **Add an activity or resource**. 1. Choose **External tool** and click **Add**. 1. In the "Activity name" field, type "GitHub Classroom". 1. In the **Preconfigured tool** field, to the right of the drop-down menu, click **+**. 1. Under "External tool configuration", paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Moodle app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Tool name** | {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_<br/><br/>**Note**: You can use any name, but we suggest this value for clarity. | | **Tool URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **LTI version** | LTI 1.0/1.1 | | **Default launch container** | New window | | **Consumer key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | 1. Scroll to and click **Services**. 1. To the right of "IMS LTI Names and Role Provisioning", select the drop-down menu and click **Use this service to retrieve members' information as per privacy settings**. 1. Scroll to and click **Privacy**. 1. To the right of **Share launcher's name with tool** and **Share launcher's email with tool**, select the drop-down menus to click **Always**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save changes**. 1. In the **Preconfigure tool** menu, click **GitHub Classroom - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_**. 1. Under "Common module settings", to the right of "Availability", select the drop-down menu and click **Hide from students**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save and return to course**. 1. Navigate to anywhere you chose to display {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and click the {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} activity. ### Importing a roster from your LMS For more information about importing the roster from your LMS into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." ### Disconnecting your LMS {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Connect to a learning management system (LMS)", click **Connection Settings**.  1. Under "Delete Connection to your learning management system", click **Disconnect from your learning management system**.  145 .../education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ --- title: Create a group assignment intro: 'You can create a collaborative assignment for teams of students who participate in your course.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-group-assignments --- ### About group assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} Students can work together on a group assignment in a shared repository, like a team of professional developers. When a student accepts a group assignment, the student can create a new team or join an existing team. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} saves the teams for an assignment as a set. You can name the set of teams for a specific assignment when you create the assignment, and you can reuse that set of teams for a later assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-group-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} You can decide how many teams one assignment can have, and how many members each team can have. Each team that a student creates for an assignment is a team within your organization on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. The visibility of the team is secret. Teams that you create on {% data variables.product.product_name %} will not appear in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[About teams](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-teams)." For a video demonstration of the creation of a group assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, define teams, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Defining teams for an assignment](#defining-teams-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For a group assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the name of the team. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the team's name on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is "student-team", the name of the assignment repository for members of the team will be `assignment-1-student-team`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, then click **Group assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a individual assignment, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." #### Defining teams for an assignment If you've already created a group assignment for the classroom, you can reuse a set of teams for the new assignment. To create a new set with the teams that your students create for the assignment, type the name for the set. Optionally, type the maximum number of team members and total teams. {% tip %} **Tips**: - We recommend including details about the set of teams in the name for the set. For example, if you want to use the set of teams for one assignment, name the set after the assignment. If you want to reuse the set throughout a semester or course, name the set after the semester or course. - If you'd like to assign students to a specific team, give your students a name for the team and provide a list of members. {% endtip %}  #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each team that a student creates. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} ### Providing feedback Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the team. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see the teams that are working on or have submitted an assignment in the **Teams** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Group assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - After you create the assignment and your students form teams, team members can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and the team can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)," and the free course on [managing merge conflicts](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) from {% data variables.product.prodname_learning %}. - When a team finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand how the team collaborated. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" - [Using Existing Teams in Group Assignments?](https://education.github.community/t/using-existing-teams-in-group-assignments/6999) in the {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} Community 19 ...sework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ --- title: Create an assignment from a template repository intro: You can create an assignment from a template repository to provide starter code, documentation, and other resources to your students. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/using-template-repos-for-assignments --- You can use a template repository on {% data variables.product.product_name %} as starter code for an assignment on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Your template repository can contain boilerplate code, documentation, and other resources for your students. For more information, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." To use the template repository for your assignment, the template repository must be owned by your organization, or the visibility of the template repository must be public. {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} For more information, see "[Configure default settings for assignment repositories](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories)." ### Further reading - "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" - "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)" 124 ...tion/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ --- title: Create an individual assignment intro: You can create an assignment for students in your course to complete individually. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/creating-an-individual-assignment - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment --- ### About individual assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-individual-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} For a video demonstration of the creation of an individual assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For an individual assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the student's {% data variables.product.product_name %} username. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the student's username on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is @octocat, the name of the assignment repository for @octocat will be `assignment-1-octocat`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, and click **Individual assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a group assignment, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each student on the roster for the classroom. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} ### Providing feedback for an assignment Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the student. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see whether a student has joined the classroom and accepted or submitted an assignment in the **All students** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Individual assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - Once you create the assignment, students can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and student can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)." - When a student finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand the student's work. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" 9 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/get-started-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ --- title: Get started with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: Get started intro: Learn how to configure and use {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to administer your course. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 52 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary.md @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ --- title: Glossary intro: You can review explanations of terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### assignment An assignment is coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. A teacher can assign an assignment to an individual student or a group of students. Teachers can import starter code for the assignment, assign students, and create a deadline for each assignment. For more information, see the definitions for "[individual assignment](#individual-assignment)" and "[group assignment](#group-assignment)." --- ### classroom A classroom is the basic unit of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can use a classroom to organize and manage students, teaching assistants, and assignments for a single course. A classroom belongs to an organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. To administer a classroom, you must be an organization owner for the organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms)." --- ### {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a web application for educators that provides course administration tools integrated with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](https://classroom.github.com/) website. --- ### group assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} For more information, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." --- ### identifier An identifier in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a unique ID for a student participating in a course. For example, an identifier can be a student name, alphanumeric ID, or email address. --- ### individual assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." --- ### roster A roster allows a teacher to manage students and assignment submissions in a classroom on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can create a roster by entering a list of student identifiers, or by connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to a learning management system (LMS). For more information about identifiers, see the definition of "[identifier](#identifier)." For more information about connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." --- ### Further reading - "[{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} glossary](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary)" 32 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Manage coursework with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}' intro: With {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you can use {% data variables.product.product_name %} to administer or participate in a course about software development. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Table of Contents {% topic_link_in_list /get-started-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /glossary %} {% topic_link_in_list /teach-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /manage-classrooms %} {% link_in_list /create-an-individual-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-a-group-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository %} {% link_in_list /leave-feedback-with-pull-requests %} {% link_in_list /use-autograding %} {% link_in_list /configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories %} {% link_in_list /connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom %} {% topic_link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide %} {% link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide %} {% link_in_list /about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /about-using-replit-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /run-student-code-in-an-online-ide %} {% topic_link_in_list /learn-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /view-autograding-results %} 8 ...nage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an IDE intro: You can help your students write, test, and debug code by preconfiguring a development environment for assignment repositories on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 42 ...ursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an online IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an online IDE intro: You can preconfigure a supported online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments you create in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/online-ide-integrations --- ### About integration with an online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} After a student accepts an assignment with an online IDE, the README file in the student's assignment repository will contain a button to open the assignment in the IDE. The student can begin working immediately, and no additional configuration is necessary.  ### Supported online IDEs {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports the following online IDEs. You can learn more about the student experience for each IDE. | IDE | More information | | :- | :- | | Microsoft MakeCode Arcade | "[About using MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom)" | | Repl.it | "[About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom)" | ### Configuring an online IDE for an assignment You can choose the online IDE you'd like to use for an assignment when you create an assignment. To learn how to create a new assignment that uses an online IDE, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Authorizing the OAuth app for an online IDE The first time you configure an assignment with an online IDE, you must authorize the OAuth app for the online IDE for your organization.  For all repositories, grant the app **read** access to metadata, administration, and code, and **write** access to administration and code. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 7 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/learn-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ --- title: Learn with GitHub Classroom intro: You can participate in coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} and see results from your teacher. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 33 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Leave feedback with pull requests intro: You can leave feedback for your students in a special pull request within the repository for each assignment. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can leave feedback in a pull request for the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leaving-feedback-in-github --- ### About feedback pull requests for assignments {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} When you enable the pull request for feedback for an assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will create a special pull request titled **Feedback** in the assignment repository for each student or team. The pull request automatically shows every commit that a student pushed to the assignment repository's default branch. ### Prerequisites To create and access the feedback pull request, you must enable the feedback pull request when you create the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} ### Leaving feedback in a pull request for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. In the list of classrooms, click the classroom with the assignment you want to review.  {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **Review**.  1. Review the pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." ### Further reading - "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](http://localhost:4000/en/free-pro-team@latest/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)" 121 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms.md @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ --- title: Manage classrooms intro: You can create and manage a classroom for each course that you teach using {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. permissions: Organization owners can manage a classroom for an organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/archive-a-classroom --- ### About classrooms {% data reusables.classroom.about-classrooms %}  ### About management of classrooms {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} uses organization accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage permissions, administration, and security for each classroom that you create. Each organization can have multiple classrooms. After you create a classroom, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will prompt you to invite teaching assistants (TAs) and admins to the classroom. Each classroom can have one or more admins. Admins can be teachers, TAs, or any other course administrator who you'd like to have control over your classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Invite TAs and admins to your classroom by inviting the user accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to your organization as organization owners and sharing the URL for your classrom. Organization owners can administer any classroom for the organization. For more information, see "[Permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization)" and "[Inviting users to join your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/inviting-users-to-join-your-organization)." When you're done using a classroom, you can archive the classroom and refer to the classroom, roster, and assignments later, or you can delete the classroom if you no longer need the classroom. ### About classroom rosters Each classroom has a roster. A roster is a list of identifiers for the students who participate in your course. When you first share the URL for an assignment with a student, the student must sign into {% data variables.product.product_name %} with a user account to link the user account to an identifier for the classroom. After the student links a user account, you can see the associated user account in the roster. You can also see when the student accepts or submits an assignment.  ### Prerequisites You must have an organization account on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Types of {% data variables.product.company_short %} accounts](/github/getting-started-with-github/types-of-github-accounts#organization-accounts)" and "[Creating a new organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)." You must authorize the OAuth app for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} for your organization to manage classrooms for your organization account. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Creating a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. Click **New classroom**.  {% data reusables.classroom.guide-create-new-classroom %} After you create a classroom, you can begin creating assignments for students. For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Creating a roster for your classroom You can create a roster of the students who participate in your course. If your course already has a roster, you can update the students on the roster or delete the roster. For more information, see "[Adding a student to the roster for your classroom](#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)" or "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To connect {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to your LMS and import a roster, click {% octicon "mortar-board" aria-label="The mortar board icon" %} **Import from a learning management system** and follow the instructions. For more information, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)."  1. To create a roster manually, type your student identifiers. Optionally, click **Upload a CSV or text file** to upload a file containing the identifiers.  1. Click **Create roster**.  ### Adding students to the roster for your classroom Your classroom must have an existing roster to add students to the roster. For more information about creating a roster, see "[Creating a roster for your classrom](#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To the right of "Classroom roster", click **Update students**.  1. Follow the instructions to add students to the roster. - To import students from an LMS, click **Sync from a learning management system**. For more information about importing a roster from an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." - To manually add students, under "Manually add students", click **Upload a CSV or text file** or type the identifiers for the students, then click **Add roster entries**.  ### Renaming a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Classroom name", type a new name for the classroom.  1. Click **Rename classroom**.  ### Archiving or unarchiving a classroom You can archive a classroom that you no longer use on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When you archive a classroom, you can't create new assignments or edit existing assignments for the classroom. Students can't accept invitations to assignments in archived classrooms. {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. To the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Archive**.  1. To unarchive a classroom, to the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Unarchive**.  ### Deleting a roster for a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. Under "Delete this roster", click **Delete roster**.  1. Read the warnings, then click **Delete roster**.  ### Deleting a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. To the right of "Delete this classroom", click **Delete classroom**.  1. **Read the warnings**. 1. To verify that you're deleting the correct classroom, type the name of the classroom you want to delete.  1. Click **Delete classroom**.  22 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/run-student-code-in-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ --- title: Run student code in an online IDE intro: You can run the code from a student assignment within the online integrated development environment (IDE) that you configured for the assignment. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/running-student-code --- ### About student code and online IDEs If you configure an online integrated development environment (IDE) for an assignment, you can run the code within the online IDE. You don't need to clone the assignment repository to your computer. For more information about online IDEs, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." ### Running student code in the online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **View IDE**.  8 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Teach with GitHub Classroom intro: Learn how to set up your classroom and assignments. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 93 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding.md 30 ...t/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/view-autograding-results.md 90 content/education/quickstart.md 1 ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md → ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md 1 ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md → ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md 1 ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md → ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md 5 ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md → ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md 9 ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md → ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md 5 .../applying-for-a-student-developer-pack.md → ...ion/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack.md 14 ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md → ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md 26 content/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/index.md 3 ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md → ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md 3 ...ation/using-github-for-your-schoolwork.md → ...ucation/use-github-for-your-schoolwork.md 3 ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md → ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md 5 ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md → ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md 3 ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md → ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md 20 ...ering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository.md 5 content/github/administering-a-repository/index.md 2 content/github/authenticating-to-github/reviewing-your-security-log.md 1 content/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/index.md 74 ...with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-dependency-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 19 ...g-with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-proposed-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 10 content/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-repositories.md 15 content/github/customizing-your-github-workflow/about-github-marketplace.md 2 content/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources.md 4 content/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary.md 6 content/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account.md 1 content/github/index.md 2 ...b/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-alerts-for-vulnerable-dependencies.md 25 ...hub/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-managing-vulnerable-dependencies.md 1 content/github/managing-security-vulnerabilities/index.md 4 ...nerabilities/viewing-and-updating-vulnerable-dependencies-in-your-repository.md 3 ...criptions-and-notifications-on-github/managing-notifications-from-your-inbox.md 6 content/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues.md 3 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/about-searching-on-github.md 5 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/index.md 114 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions.md 2 ...ithub/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-issues-and-pull-requests.md 2 ...nd-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/about-billing-for-github-sponsors.md 4 ...-billing-and-payments-on-github/discounted-subscriptions-for-github-accounts.md 19 ...ing-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/downgrading-a-sponsorship.md 16 ...tting-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/upgrading-a-sponsorship.md 4 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/index.md 27 ...and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization.md 25 ...izations-and-teams/managing-updates-from-accounts-your-organization-sponsors.md 3 ...p-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 14 ...ing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 86 ...naging-organizations-and-teams/reviewing-the-audit-log-for-your-organization.md 1 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/index.md 24 ...etting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/managing-your-theme-settings.md 12 content/github/site-policy/github-additional-product-terms.md 8 ...porting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/about-github-sponsors.md 17 ...community-with-github-sponsors/attributing-sponsorships-to-your-organization.md 28 ...e-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/changing-your-sponsorship-tiers.md 22 ...th-github-sponsors/configuring-webhooks-for-events-in-your-sponsored-account.md 17 ...ting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/contacting-your-sponsors.md 25 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/editing-your-profile-details-for-github-sponsors.md 1 content/github/supporting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/index.md 12 ...ce-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-payouts-from-github-sponsors.md 18 ...he-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship-goal.md 39 ...ing-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-organization.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-user-account.md 62 ...-source-community-with-github-sponsors/sponsoring-an-open-source-contributor.md 27 ...source-community-with-github-sponsors/viewing-your-sponsors-and-sponsorships.md 23 content/github/teaching-and-learning-with-github-education/index.md This file was deleted. 7 ...nt/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs/about-the-dependency-graph.md 1 content/github/working-with-github-support/index.md 10 content/graphql/README.md 58 ...tting-started-with-github-container-registry/about-github-container-registry.md This file was deleted. 15 content/packages/getting-started-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 95 content/packages/guides/about-github-container-registry.md 2 ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md → ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md 5 ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md 2 ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md → ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md 10 content/packages/guides/container-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...er-registry/deleting-a-container-image.md → ...ages/guides/deleting-a-container-image.md 2 ...ry/enabling-improved-container-support.md → ...es/enabling-improved-container-support.md 33 content/packages/guides/index.md 2 ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md → ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md 10 content/packages/guides/package-client-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...stry/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md → ...ides/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md 1 ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md → ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md 46 content/packages/index.md 60 ...anaging-packages/about-github-packages.md → ...-github-packages/about-github-packages.md 13 ...concepts-for-github-container-registry.md → ...ages/core-concepts-for-github-packages.md 16 content/packages/learn-github-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/publishing-a-package.md → ...n-github-packages/publishing-a-package.md 3 ...d-managing-packages/deleting-a-package.md → ...ges/manage-packages/deleting-a-package.md 8 ...publishing-and-managing-packages/index.md → content/packages/manage-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/installing-a-package.md → ...s/manage-packages/installing-a-package.md 1 ...and-managing-packages/viewing-packages.md → ...kages/manage-packages/viewing-packages.md 11 content/packages/managing-container-images-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 109 content/packages/quickstart.md 20 content/packages/using-github-packages-with-your-projects-ecosystem/index.md This file was deleted. 10 content/rest/README.md 18 content/rest/overview/resources-in-the-rest-api.md 2 content/rest/overview/troubleshooting.md 10 content/rest/reference/enterprise-admin.md 2 data/products.yml 2 data/reusables/accounts/create-account.md 2 data/reusables/actions/actions-not-verified.md 7 data/reusables/actions/visualization-beta.md 5 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-api-info.md 1 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-git-events-retention.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-assignments.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-classrooms.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-online-ides.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-classroom-prerequisite.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-group-definition.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-template-repository.md 9 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-visibility.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics.md 7 ...s/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-the-assignment.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-intro-for-environment.md 3 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-prevent-changes.md 23 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-using-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-individual-definition.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-to-prevent-submission.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-type-a-title.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-group-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-individual-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-enables-invitation-urls.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-settings.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-students.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/for-more-information-about-assignment-creation.md 6 data/reusables/classroom/guide-create-new-classroom.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/invitation-url-warning.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/readme-contains-button-for-online-ide.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/sign-into-github-classroom.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/use-add-test-drop-down-to-click-grading-method.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-choose-a-template-repository.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-categories-and-formats.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-discussions.md 5 data/reusables/discussions/beta.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/discussions-tab.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/edit-categories.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/edit-category-details.md 8 ...les/discussions/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-your-repository.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/github-recognizes-members.md 16 data/reusables/discussions/marking-a-comment-as-an-answer.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/repository-category-limit.md 10 data/reusables/discussions/starting-a-discussion.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-categorize-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-convert-an-issue.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-use-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-cannot-convert-a-discussion.md 2 data/reusables/education/about-github-education-link.md 2 data/reusables/education/apply-for-team.md 2 data/reusables/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.md 6 data/reusables/education/educator-requirements.md 1 data/reusables/gated-features/discussions.md 1 data/reusables/marketplace/app-transfer-to-org-for-verification.md 5 data/reusables/marketplace/free-plan-note.md 2 data/reusables/marketplace/launch-with-free.md 8 data/reusables/marketplace/marketplace-billing-ui-requirements.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/billing-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta-billing-note.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/docker_registry_deprecation_status.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/feature-preview-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/required-scopes.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/viewing-packages.md 3 data/reusables/repositories/dependency-review.md 7 data/reusables/repositories/navigate-to-job-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-failed-job-results-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-specific-line-superlinter.md 2 data/reusables/search/date_gt_lt.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/billing-switcher.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/change-tier.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/choose-updates.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/developer-sponsored-choose-updates.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-developer-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-org-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 2 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-sponsorship.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-updates-for-orgs.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/maximum-tier.md 4 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-org-sponsors-dashboard.md This file was deleted. 2 ...onsors/navigate-to-sponsored-developer.md → ...sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-account.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-org.md This file was deleted. 2 ...ors/navigate-to-dev-sponsors-dashboard.md → ...ponsors/navigate-to-sponsors-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/no-fees.md 5 data/reusables/sponsors/org-sponsors-release-phase.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/prorated-sponsorship.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsor-account.md 7 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-details.md 1 data/reusables/webhooks/app_always_desc.md 3 data/ui.yml 7 data/variables/action_code_examples.yml 37 data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml 6 data/variables/product.yml 21 includes/all-articles.html 4 includes/breadcrumbs.html 2 includes/code-example-card.html 14 includes/discussions-community-card.html 2 includes/header-notification.html 90 javascripts/filter-cards.js 92 javascripts/filter-code-examples.js This file was deleted. 4 javascripts/index.js 64 layouts/product-landing.html 68 lib/data-directory.js 28 lib/filename-to-key.js 7 lib/frontmatter.js 2 lib/liquid-tags/data.js 25 lib/page.js 54 lib/pages.js 21 lib/redirects/get-docs-path-from-developer-path.js 41 lib/redirects/precompile.js 231 lib/rest/static/decorated/api.github.com.json 495 lib/rest/static/dereferenced/api.github.com.deref.json 17 lib/rewrite-local-links.js 10 lib/site-data.js 24 lib/warm-server.js 5 middleware/breadcrumbs.js 38 middleware/categories-for-support-team.js 6 middleware/contextualizers/early-access-links.js 103 middleware/csp.js 69 middleware/early-access-breadcrumbs.js 1 middleware/index.js 45 package-lock.json 3 package.json 4 script/check-s3-images.js 4 script/early-access/clone-locally 41 script/early-access/create-branch 7 server.js 2 stylesheets/article.scss 4 tests/browser/browser.js 10 tests/content/category-pages.js 2 tests/content/crowdin-config.js 3 tests/content/featured-links.js 5 tests/content/glossary.js 42 tests/content/remove-liquid-statements.js 39 tests/content/site-data-references.js 4 tests/content/site-data.js 22 tests/fixtures/rest-redirects.json 10 tests/graphql/build-changelog-test.js 9 tests/helpers/conditional-runs.js 20 tests/meta/orphan-tests.js 23 tests/rendering/breadcrumbs.js 4 tests/rendering/rest.js 3 tests/rendering/server.js 47 tests/routing/developer-site-redirects.js 10 tests/routing/redirects.js 15 tests/unit/data-directory/filename-to-key.js 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/README.md 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/bar.yaml 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/foo.json 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/nested/baz.md 40 tests/unit/data-directory/index.js 19 tests/unit/early-access.js 4 tests/unit/find-page.js 57 tests/unit/liquid-helpers.js 140 tests/unit/page.js 2 tests/unit/pages.js 0 comments on commit 1a56ed1 Leave a comment You’re not receiving notifications from this thread. © 2021 GitHub, Inc. Terms Privacy Security Status Docs Contact GitHub Pricing API Training Blog About

W3C Strategic Highlights September 2019 This report was prepared for the September 2019 W3C Advisory Committee Meeting (W3C Member link). See the accompanying W3C Fact Sheet — September 2019. For the previous edition, see the April 2019 W3C Strategic Highlights. For future editions of this report, please consult the latest version. A Chinese translation is available. ☰ Contents Introduction Future Web Standards Meeting Industry Needs Web Payments Digital Publishing Media and Entertainment Web & Telecommunications Real-Time Communications (WebRTC) Web & Networks Automotive Web of Things Strengthening the Core of the Web HTML CSS Fonts SVG Audio Performance Web Performance WebAssembly Testing Browser Testing and Tools WebPlatform Tests Web of Data Web for All Security, Privacy, Identity Internationalization (i18n) Web Accessibility Outreach to the world W3C Developer Relations W3C Training Translations W3C Liaisons Introduction This report highlights recent work of enhancement of the existing landscape of the Web platform and innovation for the growth and strength of the Web. 33 working groups and a dozen interest groups enable W3C to pursue its mission through the creation of Web standards, guidelines, and supporting materials. We track the tremendous work done across the Consortium through homogeneous work-spaces in Github which enables better monitoring and management. We are in the middle of a period where we are chartering numerous working groups which demonstrate the rapid degree of change for the Web platform: After 4 years, we are nearly ready to publish a Payment Request API Proposed Recommendation and we need to soon charter follow-on work. In the last year we chartered the Web Payment Security Interest Group. In the last year we chartered the Web Media Working Group with 7 specifications for next generation Media support on the Web. We have Accessibility Guidelines under W3C Member review which includes Silver, a new approach. We have just launched the Decentralized Identifier Working Group which has tremendous potential because Decentralized Identifier (DID) is an identifier that is globally unique, resolveable with high availability, and cryptographically verifiable. We have Privacy IG (PING) under W3C Member review which strengthens our focus on the tradeoff between privacy and function. We have a new CSS charter under W3C Member review which maps the group's work for the next three years. In this period, W3C and the WHATWG have succesfully completed the negotiation of a Memorandum of Understanding rooted in the mutual belief that that having two distinct specifications claiming to be normative is generally harmful for the Web community. The MOU, signed last May, describes how the two organizations are to collaborate on the development of a single authoritative version of the HTML and DOM specifications. W3C subsequently rechartered the HTML Working Group to assist the W3C community in raising issues and proposing solutions for the HTML and DOM specifications, and for the production of W3C Recommendations from WHATWG Review Drafts. As the Web evolves continuously, some groups are looking for ways for specifications to do so as well. So-called "evergreen recommendations" or "living standards" aim to track continuous development (and maintenance) of features, on a feature-by-feature basis, while getting review and patent commitments. We see the maturation and further development of an incredible number of new technologies coming to the Web. Continued progress in many areas demonstrates the vitality of the W3C and the Web community, as the rest of the report illustrates. Future Web Standards W3C has a variety of mechanisms for listening to what the community thinks could become good future Web standards. These include discussions with the Membership, discussions with other standards bodies, the activities of thousands of participants in over 300 community groups, and W3C Workshops. There are lots of good ideas. The W3C strategy team has been identifying promising topics and invites public participation. Future, recent and under consideration Workshops include: Inclusive XR (5-6 November 2019, Seattle, WA, USA) to explore existing and future approaches on making Virtual and Augmented Reality experiences more inclusive, including to people with disabilities; W3C Workshop on Data Models for Transportation (12-13 September 2019, Palo Alto, CA, USA) W3C Workshop on Web Games (27-28 June 2019, Redmond, WA, USA), view report Second W3C Workshop on the Web of Things (3-5 June 2019, Munich, Germany) W3C Workshop on Web Standardization for Graph Data; Creating Bridges: RDF, Property Graph and SQL (4-6 March 2019, Berlin, Germany), view report Web & Machine Learning. The Strategy Funnel documents the staff's exploration of potential new work at various phases: Exploration and Investigation, Incubation and Evaluation, and eventually to the chartering of a new standards group. The Funnel view is a GitHub Project where new area are issues represented by “cards” which move through the columns, usually from left to right. Most cards start in Exploration and move towards Chartering, or move out of the funnel. Public input is welcome at any stage but particularly once Incubation has begun. This helps W3C identify work that is sufficiently incubated to warrant standardization, to review the ecosystem around the work and indicate interest in participating in its standardization, and then to draft a charter that reflects an appropriate scope. Ongoing feedback can speed up the overall standardization process. Since the previous highlights document, W3C has chartered a number of groups, and started discussion on many more: Newly Chartered or Rechartered Web Application Security WG (03-Apr) Web Payment Security IG (17-Apr) Patent and Standards IG (24-Apr) Web Applications WG (14-May) Web & Networks IG (16-May) Media WG (23-May) Media and Entertainment IG (06-Jun) HTML WG (06-Jun) Decentralized Identifier WG (05-Sep) Extended Privacy IG (PING) (30-Sep) Verifiable Claims WG (30-Sep) Service Workers WG (31-Dec) Dataset Exchange WG (31-Dec) Web of Things Working Group (31-Dec) Web Audio Working Group (31-Dec) Proposed charters / Advance Notice Accessibility Guidelines WG Privacy IG (PING) RDF Literal Direction WG Timed Text WG CSS WG Web Authentication WG Closed Internationalization Tag Set IG Meeting Industry Needs Web Payments All Web Payments specifications W3C's payments standards enable a streamlined checkout experience, enabling a consistent user experience across the Web with lower front end development costs for merchants. Users can store and reuse information and more quickly and accurately complete online transactions. The Web Payments Working Group has republished Payment Request API as a Candidate Recommendation, aiming to publish a Proposed Recommendation in the Fall 2019, and is discussing use cases and features for Payment Request after publication of the 1.0 Recommendation. Browser vendors have been finalizing implementation of features added in the past year (view the implementation report). As work continues on the Payment Handler API and its implementation (currently in Chrome and Edge Canary), one focus in 2019 is to increase adoption in other browsers. Recently, Mastercard demonstrated the use of Payment Request API to carry out EMVCo's Secure Remote Commerce (SRC) protocol whose payment method definition is being developed with active participation by Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover. Payment method availability is a key factor in merchant considerations about adopting Payment Request API. The ability to get uniform adoption of a new payment method such as Secure Remote Commerce (SRC) also depends on the availability of the Payment Handler API in browsers, or of proprietary alternatives. Web Monetization, which the Web Payments Working Group will discuss again at its face-to-face meeting in September, can be used to enable micropayments as an alternative revenue stream to advertising. Since the beginning of 2019, Amazon, Brave Software, JCB, Certus Cybersecurity Solutions and Netflix have joined the Web Payments Working Group. In April, W3C launched the Web Payment Security Group to enable W3C, EMVCo, and the FIDO Alliance to collaborate on a vision for Web payment security and interoperability. Participants will define areas of collaboration and identify gaps between existing technical specifications in order to increase compatibility among different technologies, such as: How do SRC, FIDO, and Payment Request relate? The Payment Services Directive 2 (PSD2) regulations in Europe are scheduled to take effect in September 2019. What is the role of EMVCo, W3C, and FIDO technologies, and what is the current state of readiness for the deadline? How can we improve privacy on the Web at the same time as we meet industry requirements regarding user identity? Digital Publishing All Digital Publishing specifications, Publication milestones The Web is the universal publishing platform. Publishing is increasingly impacted by the Web, and the Web increasingly impacts Publishing. Topic of particular interest to Publishing@W3C include typography and layout, accessibility, usability, portability, distribution, archiving, offline access, print on demand, and reliable cross referencing. And the diverse publishing community represented in the groups consist of the traditional "trade" publishers, ebook reading system manufacturers, but also publishers of audio book, scholarly journals or educational materials, library scientists or browser developers. The Publishing Working Group currently concentrates on Audiobooks which lack a comprehensive standard, thus incurring extra costs and time to publish in this booming market. Active development is ongoing on the future standard: Publication Manifest Audiobook profile for Web Publications Lightweight Packaging Format The BD Comics Manga Community Group, the Synchronized Multimedia for Publications Community Group, the Publishing Community Group and a future group on archival, are companions to the working group where specific work is developed and incubated. The Publishing Community Group is a recently launched incubation channel for Publishing@W3C. The goal of the group is to propose, document, and prototype features broadly related to: publications on the Web reading modes and systems and the user experience of publications The EPUB 3 Community Group has successfully completed the revision of EPUB 3.2. The Publishing Business Group fosters ongoing participation by members of the publishing industry and the overall ecosystem in the development of Web infrastructure to better support the needs of the industry. The Business Group serves as an additional conduit to the Publishing Working Group and several Community Groups for feedback between the publishing ecosystem and W3C. The Publishing BG has played a vital role in fostering and advancing the adoption and continued development of EPUB 3. In particular the BG provided critical support to the update of EPUBCheck to validate EPUB content to the new EPUB 3.2 specification. This resulted in the development, in conjunction with the EPUB3 Community Group, of a new generation of EPUBCheck, i.e., EPUBCheck 4.2 production-ready release. Media and Entertainment All Media specifications The Media and Entertainment vertical tracks media-related topics and features that create immersive experiences for end users. HTML5 brought standard audio and video elements to the Web. Standardization activities since then have aimed at turning the Web into a professional platform fully suitable for the delivery of media content and associated materials, enabling missing features to stream video content on the Web such as adaptive streaming and content protection. Together with Microsoft, Comcast, Netflix and Google, W3C received an Technology & Engineering Emmy Award in April 2019 for standardization of a full TV experience on the Web. Current goals are to: Reinforce core media technologies: Creation of the Media Working Group, to develop media-related specifications incubated in the WICG (e.g. Media Capabilities, Picture-in-picture, Media Session) and maintain maintain/evolve Media Source Extensions (MSE) and Encrypted Media Extensions (EME). Improve support for Media Timed Events: data cues incubation. Enhance color support (HDR, wide gamut), in scope of the CSS WG and in the Color on the Web CG. Reduce fragmentation: Continue annual releases of a common and testable baseline media devices, in scope of the Web Media APIs CG and in collaboration with the CTA WAVE Project. Maintain the Road-map of Media Technologies for the Web which highlights Web technologies that can be used to build media applications and services, as well as known gaps to enable additional use cases. Create the future: Discuss perspectives for Media and Entertainment for the Web. Bring the power of GPUs to the Web (graphics, machine learning, heavy processing), under incubation in the GPU for the Web CG. Transition to a Working Group is under discussion. Determine next steps after the successful W3C Workshop on Web Games of June 2019. View the report. Timed Text The Timed Text Working Group develops and maintains formats used for the representation of text synchronized with other timed media, like audio and video, and notably works on TTML, profiles of TTML, and WebVTT. Recent progress includes: A robust WebVTT implementation report poises the specification for publication as a proposed recommendation. Discussions around re-chartering, notably to add a TTML Profile for Audio Description deliverable to the scope of the group, and clarify that rendering of captions within XR content is also in scope. Immersive Web Hardware that enables Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR) applications are now broadly available to consumers, offering an immersive computing platform with both new opportunities and challenges. The ability to interact directly with immersive hardware is critical to ensuring that the web is well equipped to operate as a first-class citizen in this environment. The Immersive Web Working Group has been stabilizing the WebXR Device API while the companion Immersive Web Community Group incubates the next series of features identified as key for the future of the Immersive Web. W3C plans a workshop focused on the needs and benefits at the intersection of VR & Accessibility (Inclusive XR), on 5-6 November 2019 in Seattle, WA, USA, to explore existing and future approaches on making Virtual and Augmented Reality experiences more inclusive. Web & Telecommunications The Web is the Open Platform for Mobile. Telecommunication service providers and network equipment providers have long been critical actors in the deployment of Web technologies. As the Web platform matures, it brings richer and richer capabilities to extend existing services to new users and devices, and propose new and innovative services. Real-Time Communications (WebRTC) All Real-Time Communications specifications WebRTC has reshaped the whole communication landscape by making any connected device a potential communication end-point, bringing audio and video communications anywhere, on any network, vastly expanding the ability of operators to reach their customers. WebRTC serves as the corner-stone of many online communication and collaboration services. The WebRTC Working Group aims to bringing WebRTC 1.0 (and companion specification Media Capture and Streams) to Recommendation by the end of 2019. Intense efforts are focused on testing (supported by a dedicated hackathon at IETF 104) and interoperability. The group is considering pushing features that have not gotten enough traction to separate modules or to a later minor revision of the spec. Beyond WebRTC 1.0, the WebRTC Working Group will focus its efforts on WebRTC NV which the group has started documenting by identifying use cases. Web & Networks Recently launched, in the wake of the May 2018 Web5G workshop, the Web & Networks Interest Group is chaired by representatives from AT&T, China Mobile and Intel, with a goal to explore solutions for web applications to achieve better performance and resource allocation, both on the device and network. The group's first efforts are around use cases, privacy & security requirements and liaisons. Automotive All Automotive specifications To create a rich application ecosystem for vehicles and other devices allowed to connect to the vehicle, the W3C Automotive Working Group is delivering a service specification to expose all common vehicle signals (engine temperature, fuel/charge level, range, tire pressure, speed, etc.) The Vehicle Information Service Specification (VISS), which is a Candidate Recommendation, is seeing more implementations across the industry. It provides the access method to a common data model for all the vehicle signals –presently encapsulating a thousand or so different data elements– and will be growing to accommodate the advances in automotive such as autonomous and driver assist technologies and electrification. The group is already working on a successor to VISS, leveraging the underlying data model and the VIWI submission from Volkswagen, for a more robust means of accessing vehicle signals information and the same paradigm for other automotive needs including location-based services, media, notifications and caching content. The Automotive and Web Platform Business Group acts as an incubator for prospective standards work. One of its task forces is using W3C VISS in performing data sampling and off-boarding the information to the cloud. Access to the wealth of information that W3C's auto signals standard exposes is of interest to regulators, urban planners, insurance companies, auto manufacturers, fleet managers and owners, service providers and others. In addition to components needed for data sampling and edge computing, capturing user and owner consent, information collection methods and handling of data are in scope. The upcoming W3C Workshop on Data Models for Transportation (September 2019) is expected to focus on the need of additional ontologies around transportation space. Web of Things All Web of Things specifications W3C's Web of Things work is designed to bridge disparate technology stacks to allow devices to work together and achieve scale, thus enabling the potential of the Internet of Things by eliminating fragmentation and fostering interoperability. Thing descriptions expressed in JSON-LD cover the behavior, interaction affordances, data schema, security configuration, and protocol bindings. The Web of Things complements existing IoT ecosystems to reduce the cost and risk for suppliers and consumers of applications that create value by combining multiple devices and information services. There are many sectors that will benefit, e.g. smart homes, smart cities, smart industry, smart agriculture, smart healthcare and many more. The Web of Things Working Group is finishing the initial Web of Things standards, with support from the Web of Things Interest Group: Web of Things Architecture Thing Descriptions Strengthening the Core of the Web HTML The HTML Working Group was chartered early June to assist the W3C community in raising issues and proposing solutions for the HTML and DOM specifications, and to produce W3C Recommendations from WHATWG Review Drafts. A few days before, W3C and the WHATWG signed a Memorandum of Understanding outlining the agreement to collaborate on the development of a single version of the HTML and DOM specifications. Issues and proposed solutions for HTML and DOM done via the newly rechartered HTML Working Group in the WHATWG repositories The HTML Working Group is targetting November 2019 to bring HTML and DOM to Candidate Recommendations. CSS All CSS specifications CSS is a critical part of the Open Web Platform. The CSS Working Group gathers requirements from two large groups of CSS users: the publishing industry and application developers. Within W3C, those groups are exemplified by the Publishing groups and the Web Platform Working Group. The former requires things like better pagination support and advanced font handling, the latter needs intelligent (and fast!) scrolling and animations. What we know as CSS is actually a collection of almost a hundred specifications, referred to as ‘modules’. The current state of CSS is defined by a snapshot, updated once a year. The group also publishes an index defining every term defined by CSS specifications. Fonts All Fonts specifications The Web Fonts Working Group develops specifications that allow the interoperable deployment of downloadable fonts on the Web, with a focus on Progressive Font Enrichment as well as maintenance of WOFF Recommendations. Recent and ongoing work includes: Early API experiments by Adobe and Monotype have demonstrated the feasibility of a font enrichment API, where a server delivers a font with minimal glyph repertoire and the client can query the full repertoire and request additional subsets on-the-fly. In other experiments, the Brotli compression used in WOFF 2 was extended to support shared dictionaries and patch update. Metrics to quantify improvement are a current hot discussion topic. The group will meet at ATypi 2019 in Japan, to gather requirements from the international typography community. The group will first produce a report summarizing the strengths and weaknesses of each prototype solution by Q2 2020. SVG All SVG specifications SVG is an important and widely-used part of the Open Web Platform. The SVG Working Group focuses on aligning the SVG 2.0 specification with browser implementations, having split the specification into a currently-implemented 2.0 and a forward-looking 2.1. Current activity is on stabilization, increased integration with the Open Web Platform, and test coverage analysis. The Working Group was rechartered in March 2019. A new work item concerns native (non-Web-browser) uses of SVG as a non-interactive, vector graphics format. Audio The Web Audio Working Group was extended to finish its work on the Web Audio API, expecting to publish it as a Recommendation by year end. The specification enables synthesizing audio in the browser. Audio operations are performed with audio nodes, which are linked together to form a modular audio routing graph. Multiple sources — with different types of channel layout — are supported. This modular design provides the flexibility to create complex audio functions with dynamic effects. The first version of Web Audio API is now feature complete and is implemented in all modern browsers. Work has started on the next version, and new features are being incubated in the Audio Community Group. Performance Web Performance All Web Performance specifications There are currently 18 specifications in development in the Web Performance Working Group aiming to provide methods to observe and improve aspects of application performance of user agent features and APIs. The W3C team is looking at related work incubated in the W3C GPU for the Web (WebGPU) Community Group which is poised to transition to a W3C Working Group. A preliminary draft charter is available. WebAssembly All WebAssembly specifications WebAssembly improves Web performance and power by being a virtual machine and execution environment enabling loaded pages to run native (compiled) code. It is deployed in Firefox, Edge, Safari and Chrome. The specification will soon reach Candidate Recommendation. WebAssembly enables near-native performance, optimized load time, and perhaps most importantly, a compilation target for existing code bases. While it has a small number of native types, much of the performance increase relative to Javascript derives from its use of consistent typing. WebAssembly leverages decades of optimization for compiled languages and the byte code is optimized for compactness and streaming (the web page starts executing while the rest of the code downloads). Network and API access all occurs through accompanying Javascript libraries -- the security model is identical to that of Javascript. Requirements gathering and language development occur in the Community Group while the Working Group manages test development, community review and progression of specifications on the Recommendation Track. Testing Browser testing plays a critical role in the growth of the Web by: Improving the reliability of Web technology definitions; Improving the quality of implementations of these technologies by helping vendors to detect bugs in their products; Improving the data available to Web developers on known bugs and deficiencies of Web technologies by publishing results of these tests. Browser Testing and Tools The Browser Testing and Tools Working Group is developing WebDriver version 2, having published last year the W3C Recommendation of WebDriver. WebDriver acts as a remote control interface that enables introspection and control of user agents, provides a platform- and language-neutral wire protocol as a way for out-of-process programs to remotely instruct the behavior of Web, and emulates the actions of a real person using the browser. WebPlatform Tests The WebPlatform Tests project now provides a mechanism which allows to fully automate tests that previously needed to be run manually: TestDriver. TestDriver enables sending trusted key and mouse events, sending complex series of trusted pointer and key interactions for things like in-content drag-and-drop or pinch zoom, and even file upload. Since 2014 W3C began work on this coordinated open-source effort to build a cross-browser test suite for the Web Platform, which WHATWG, and all major browsers adopted. Web of Data All Data specifications There have been several great success stories around the standardization of data on the web over the past year. Verifiable Claims seems to have significant uptake. It is also significant that the Distributed Identifier WG charter has received numerous favorable reviews, and was just recently launched. JSON-LD has been a major success with the large deployment on Web sites via schema.org. JSON-LD 1.1 completed technical work, about to transition to CR More than 25% of websites today include schema.org data in JSON-LD The Web of Things description is in CR since May, making use of JSON-LD Verifiable Credentials data model is in CR since July, also making use of JSON-LD Continued strong interest in decentralized identifiers Engagement from the TAG with reframing core documents, such as Ethical Web Principles, to include data on the web within their scope Data is increasingly important for all organizations, especially with the rise of IoT and Big Data. W3C has a mature and extensive suite of standards relating to data that were developed over two decades of experience, with plans for further work on making it easier for developers to work with graph data and knowledge graphs. Linked Data is about the use of URIs as names for things, the ability to dereference these URIs to get further information and to include links to other data. There are ever-increasing sources of open Linked Data on the Web, as well as data services that are restricted to the suppliers and consumers of those services. The digital transformation of industry is seeking to exploit advanced digital technologies. This will facilitate businesses to integrate horizontally along the supply and value chains, and vertically from the factory floor to the office floor. W3C is seeking to make it easier to support enterprise-wide data management and governance, reflecting the strategic importance of data to modern businesses. Traditional approaches to data have focused on tabular databases (SQL/RDBMS), Comma Separated Value (CSV) files, and data embedded in PDF documents and spreadsheets. We're now in midst of a major shift to graph data with nodes and labeled directed links between them. Graph data is: Faster than using SQL and associated JOIN operations More favorable to integrating data from heterogeneous sources Better suited to situations where the data model is evolving In the wake of the recent W3C Workshop on Graph Data we are in the process of launching a Graph Standardization Business Group to provide a business perspective with use cases and requirements, to coordinate technical standards work and liaisons with external organizations. Web for All Security, Privacy, Identity All Security specifications, all Privacy specifications Authentication on the Web As the WebAuthn Level 1 W3C Recommendation published last March is seeing wide implementation and adoption of strong cryptographic authentication, work is proceeding on Level 2. The open standard Web API gives native authentication technology built into native platforms, browsers, operating systems (including mobile) and hardware, offering protection against hacking, credential theft, phishing attacks, thus aiming to end the era of passwords as a security construct. You may read more in our March press release. Privacy An increasing number of W3C specifications are benefitting from Privacy and Security review; there are security and privacy aspects to every specification. Early review is essential. Working with the TAG, the Privacy Interest Group has updated the Self-Review Questionnaire: Security and Privacy. Other recent work of the group includes public blogging further to the exploration of anti-patterns in standards and permission prompts. Security The Web Application Security Working Group adopted Feature Policy, aiming to allow developers to selectively enable, disable, or modify the behavior of some of these browser features and APIs within their application; and Fetch Metadata, aiming to provide servers with enough information to make a priori decisions about whether or not to service a request based on the way it was made, and the context in which it will be used. The Web Payment Security Interest Group, launched last April, convenes members from W3C, EMVCo, and the FIDO Alliance to discuss cooperative work to enhance the security and interoperability of Web payments (read more about payments). Internationalization (i18n) All Internationalization specifications, educational articles related to Internationalization, spec developers checklist Only a quarter or so current Web users use English online and that proportion will continue to decrease as the Web reaches more and more communities of limited English proficiency. If the Web is to live up to the "World Wide" portion of its name, and for the Web to truly work for stakeholders all around the world engaging with content in various languages, it must support the needs of worldwide users as they engage with content in the various languages. The growth of epublishing also brings requirements for new features and improved typography on the Web. It is important to ensure the needs of local communities are captured. The W3C Internationalization Initiative was set up to increase in-house resources dedicated to accelerating progress in making the World Wide Web "worldwide" by gathering user requirements, supporting developers, and education & outreach. For an overview of current projects see the i18n radar. W3C's Internationalization efforts progressed on a number of fronts recently: Requirements: New African and European language groups will work on the gap analysis, errata and layout requirements. Gap analysis: Japanese, Devanagari, Bengali, Tamil, Lao, Khmer, Javanese, and Ethiopic updated in the gap-analysis documents. Layout requirements document: notable progress tracked in the Southeast Asian Task Force while work continues on Chinese layout requirements. Developer support: Spec reviews: the i18n WG continues active review of specifications of the WHATWG and other W3C Working Groups. Short review checklist: easy way to begin a self-review to help spec developers understand what aspects of their spec are likely to need attention for internationalization, and points them to more detailed checklists for the relevant topics. It also helps those reviewing specs for i18n issues. Strings on the Web: Language and Direction Metadata lays out issues and discusses potential solutions for passing information about language and direction with strings in JSON or other data formats. The document was rewritten for clarity, and expanded. The group is collaborating with the JSON-LD and Web Publishing groups to develop a plan for updating RDF, JSON-LD and related specifications to handle metadata for base direction of text (bidi). User-friendly test format: a new format was developed for Internationalization Test Suite tests, which displays helpful information about how the test works. This particularly useful because those tests are pointed to by educational materials and gap-analysis documents. Web Platform Tests: a large number of tests in the i18n test suite have been ported to the WPT repository, including: css-counter-styles, css-ruby, css-syntax, css-test, css-text-decor, css-writing-modes, and css-pseudo. Education & outreach: (for all educational materials, see the HTML & CSS Authoring Techniques) Web Accessibility All Accessibility specifications, WAI resources The Web Accessibility Initiative supports W3C's Web for All mission. Recent achievements include: Education and training: Inaccessibility of CAPTCHA updated to bring our analysis and recommendations up to date with CAPTCHA practice today, concluding two years of extensive work and invaluable input from the public (read more on the W3C Blog Learn why your web content and applications should be accessible. The Education and Outreach Working Group has completed revision and updating of the Business Case for Digital Accessibility. Accessibility guidelines: The Accessibility Guidelines Working Group has continued to update WCAG Techniques and Understanding WCAG 2.1; and published a Candidate Recommendation of Accessibility Conformance Testing Rules Format 1.0 to improve inter-rater reliability when evaluating conformance of web content to WCAG An updated charter is being developed to host work on "Silver", the next generation accessibility guidelines (WCAG 2.2) There are accessibility aspects to most specifications. Check your work with the FAST checklist. Outreach to the world W3C Developer Relations To foster the excellent feedback loop between Web Standards development and Web developers, and to grow participation from that diverse community, recent W3C Developer Relations activities include: @w3cdevs tracks the enormous amount of work happening across W3C W3C Track during the Web Conference 2019 in San Francisco Tech videos: W3C published the 2019 Web Games Workshop videos The 16 September 2019 Developer Meetup in Fukuoka, Japan, is open to all and will combine a set of technical demos prepared by W3C groups, and a series of talks on a selected set of W3C technologies and projects W3C is involved with Mozilla, Google, Samsung, Microsoft and Bocoup in the organization of ViewSource 2019 in Amsterdam (read more on the W3C Blog) W3C Training In partnership with EdX, W3C's MOOC training program, W3Cx offers a complete "Front-End Web Developer" (FEWD) professional certificate program that consists of a suite of five courses on the foundational languages that power the Web: HTML5, CSS and JavaScript. We count nearly 900K students from all over the world. Translations Many Web users rely on translations of documents developed at W3C whose official language is English. W3C is extremely grateful to the continuous efforts of its community in ensuring our various deliverables in general, and in our specifications in particular, are made available in other languages, for free, ensuring their exposure to a much more diverse set of readers. Last Spring we developed a more robust system, a new listing of translations of W3C specifications and updated the instructions on how to contribute to our translation efforts. W3C Liaisons Liaisons and coordination with numerous organizations and Standards Development Organizations (SDOs) is crucial for W3C to: make sure standards are interoperable coordinate our respective agenda in Internet governance: W3C participates in ICANN, GIPO, IGF, the I* organizations (ICANN, IETF, ISOC, IAB). ensure at the government liaison level that our standards work is officially recognized when important to our membership so that products based on them (often done by our members) are part of procurement orders. W3C has ARO/PAS status with ISO. W3C participates in the EU MSP and Rolling Plan on Standardization ensure the global set of Web and Internet standards form a compatible stack of technologies, at the technical and policy level (patent regime, fragmentation, use in policy making) promote Standards adoption equally by the industry, the public sector, and the public at large Coralie Mercier, Editor, W3C Marketing & Communications $Id: Overview.html,v 1.60 2019/10/15 12:05:52 coralie Exp $ Copyright © 2019 W3C ® (MIT, ERCIM, Keio, Beihang) Usage policies apply.

The “Institute of Current Students” Website (web based application) is useful for the students, faculty, guest who likes to display result as well schedules of examination and all that task like event, news, students can find out list of fresh courses offered by them and admission procedure, discussion forum, fee structure etc. without going to institute. It provides the facility to the students or guest to have complete information about the institute. In this website, does not need to perform papers work likes to make result sheet on papers and then put on the notice board. But on this site just go to the database and update the result and other information. “Institute of Current Students” is a web enabled project with client server application. This website is an initiative to take all the academic and administrative processes of the Institute for IT backbone. This Project is purely web-based that can be accessed from any part of the world with the help of any standard web browser and a working internet connection. “Institute of Current Students” is an automation system which is used to store the information of Institute, faculty, student, exams, and results in the Institute database. Starting from registration of a new student in the institute, it maintains all the details regarding the details about the student and marks of the students. We can also call institute as “Institute Information Centre”. Institute Information Centre provides a solution of all problems in the form of easy to configure and use application by automating all the functionality. To make this website work successfully I shall be using some latest technology such as BOOTSTRAP FRAMEWORK for designing, PHP as the Development Platform and MYSQL as the Database Management environment.

Code Issues 0 Pull requests 0 Pulse MaTaDoR/ 3233fdf V 5.7 MaTaDoR @MaTaDoRTeaMMaTaDoRTeaM committed on GitHub about 1 month ago 2 changed files 2,704 additions and 0 deletions cli/tg/tdcli.lua @@ -0,0 +1,2704 @@ +--[[ + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, + MA 02110-1301, USA. + +]]-- + +-- Vector example form is like this: {[0] = v} or {v1, v2, v3, [0] = v} +-- If false or true crashed your telegram-cli, try to change true to 1 and false to 0 + +-- Main Bot Framework +local M = {} + +-- @chat_id = user, group, channel, and broadcast +-- @group_id = normal group +-- @channel_id = channel and broadcast +local function getChatId(chat_id) + local chat = {} + local chat_id = tostring(chat_id) + + if chat_id:match('^-100') then + local channel_id = chat_id:gsub('-100', '') + chat = {ID = channel_id, type = 'channel'} + else + local group_id = chat_id:gsub('-', '') + chat = {ID = group_id, type = 'group'} + end + + return chat +end + +local function getInputFile(file) + if file:match('/') then + infile = {ID = "InputFileLocal", path_ = file} + elseif file:match('^%d+$') then + infile = {ID = "InputFileId", id_ = file} + else + infile = {ID = "InputFilePersistentId", persistent_id_ = file} + end + + return infile +end + +-- User can send bold, italic, and monospace text uses HTML or Markdown format. +local function getParseMode(parse_mode) + if parse_mode then + local mode = parse_mode:lower() + + if mode == 'markdown' or mode == 'md' then + P = {ID = "TextParseModeMarkdown"} + elseif mode == 'html' then + P = {ID = "TextParseModeHTML"} + end + end + + return P +end + +-- Returns current authorization state, offline request +local function getAuthState(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetAuthState", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getAuthState = getAuthState + +-- Sets user's phone number and sends authentication code to the user. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitPhoneNumber. +-- If phone number is not recognized or another error has happened, returns an error. Otherwise returns authStateWaitCode +-- @phone_number User's phone number in any reasonable format +-- @allow_flash_call Pass True, if code can be sent via flash call to the specified phone number +-- @is_current_phone_number Pass true, if the phone number is used on the current device. Ignored if allow_flash_call is False +local function setAuthPhoneNumber(phone_number, allow_flash_call, is_current_phone_number, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetAuthPhoneNumber", + phone_number_ = phone_number, + allow_flash_call_ = allow_flash_call, + is_current_phone_number_ = is_current_phone_number + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setAuthPhoneNumber = setAuthPhoneNumber + +-- Resends authentication code to the user. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitCode and next_code_type of result is not null. +-- Returns authStateWaitCode on success +local function resendAuthCode(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ResendAuthCode", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.resendAuthCode = resendAuthCode + +-- Checks authentication code. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitCode. +-- Returns authStateWaitPassword or authStateOk on success +-- @code Verification code from SMS, Telegram message, voice call or flash call +-- @first_name User first name, if user is yet not registered, 1-255 characters +-- @last_name Optional user last name, if user is yet not registered, 0-255 characters +local function checkAuthCode(code, first_name, last_name, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CheckAuthCode", + code_ = code, + first_name_ = first_name, + last_name_ = last_name + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.checkAuthCode = checkAuthCode + +-- Checks password for correctness. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitPassword. +-- Returns authStateOk on success +-- @password Password to check +local function checkAuthPassword(password, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CheckAuthPassword", + password_ = password + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.checkAuthPassword = checkAuthPassword + +-- Requests to send password recovery code to email. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitPassword. +-- Returns authStateWaitPassword on success +local function requestAuthPasswordRecovery(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "RequestAuthPasswordRecovery", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.requestAuthPasswordRecovery = requestAuthPasswordRecovery + +-- Recovers password with recovery code sent to email. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitPassword. +-- Returns authStateOk on success +-- @recovery_code Recovery code to check +local function recoverAuthPassword(recovery_code, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "RecoverAuthPassword", + recovery_code_ = recovery_code + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.recoverAuthPassword = recoverAuthPassword + +-- Logs out user. +-- If force == false, begins to perform soft log out, returns authStateLoggingOut after completion. +-- If force == true then succeeds almost immediately without cleaning anything at the server, but returns error with code 401 and description "Unauthorized" +-- @force If true, just delete all local data. Session will remain in list of active sessions +local function resetAuth(force, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ResetAuth", + force_ = force or nil + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.resetAuth = resetAuth + +-- Check bot's authentication token to log in as a bot. +-- Works only when authGetState returns authStateWaitPhoneNumber. +-- Can be used instead of setAuthPhoneNumber and checkAuthCode to log in. +-- Returns authStateOk on success +-- @token Bot token +local function checkAuthBotToken(token, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CheckAuthBotToken", + token_ = token + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.checkAuthBotToken = checkAuthBotToken + +-- Returns current state of two-step verification +local function getPasswordState(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetPasswordState", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getPasswordState = getPasswordState + +-- Changes user password. +-- If new recovery email is specified, then error EMAIL_UNCONFIRMED is returned and password change will not be applied until email confirmation. +-- Application should call getPasswordState from time to time to check if email is already confirmed +-- @old_password Old user password +-- @new_password New user password, may be empty to remove the password +-- @new_hint New password hint, can be empty +-- @set_recovery_email Pass True, if recovery email should be changed +-- @new_recovery_email New recovery email, may be empty +local function setPassword(old_password, new_password, new_hint, set_recovery_email, new_recovery_email, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetPassword", + old_password_ = old_password, + new_password_ = new_password, + new_hint_ = new_hint, + set_recovery_email_ = set_recovery_email, + new_recovery_email_ = new_recovery_email + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setPassword = setPassword + +-- Returns set up recovery email. +-- This method can be used to verify a password provided by the user +-- @password Current user password +local function getRecoveryEmail(password, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetRecoveryEmail", + password_ = password + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getRecoveryEmail = getRecoveryEmail + +-- Changes user recovery email. +-- If new recovery email is specified, then error EMAIL_UNCONFIRMED is returned and email will not be changed until email confirmation. +-- Application should call getPasswordState from time to time to check if email is already confirmed. +-- If new_recovery_email coincides with the current set up email succeeds immediately and aborts all other requests waiting for email confirmation +-- @password Current user password +-- @new_recovery_email New recovery email +local function setRecoveryEmail(password, new_recovery_email, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetRecoveryEmail", + password_ = password, + new_recovery_email_ = new_recovery_email + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setRecoveryEmail = setRecoveryEmail + +-- Requests to send password recovery code to email +local function requestPasswordRecovery(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "RequestPasswordRecovery", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.requestPasswordRecovery = requestPasswordRecovery + +-- Recovers password with recovery code sent to email +-- @recovery_code Recovery code to check +local function recoverPassword(recovery_code, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "RecoverPassword", + recovery_code_ = tostring(recovery_code) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.recoverPassword = recoverPassword + +-- Returns current logged in user +local function getMe(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetMe", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getMe = getMe + +-- Returns information about a user by its identifier, offline request if current user is not a bot +-- @user_id User identifier +local function getUser(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetUser", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getUser = getUser + +-- Returns full information about a user by its identifier +-- @user_id User identifier +local function getUserFull(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetUserFull", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getUserFull = getUserFull + +-- Returns information about a group by its identifier, offline request if current user is not a bot +-- @group_id Group identifier +local function getGroup(group_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetGroup", + group_id_ = getChatId(group_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getGroup = getGroup + +-- Returns full information about a group by its identifier +-- @group_id Group identifier +local function getGroupFull(group_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetGroupFull", + group_id_ = getChatId(group_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getGroupFull = getGroupFull + +-- Returns information about a channel by its identifier, offline request if current user is not a bot +-- @channel_id Channel identifier +local function getChannel(channel_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChannel", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChannel = getChannel + +-- Returns full information about a channel by its identifier, cached for at most 1 minute +-- @channel_id Channel identifier +local function getChannelFull(channel_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChannelFull", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChannelFull = getChannelFull + +-- Returns information about a secret chat by its identifier, offline request +-- @secret_chat_id Secret chat identifier +local function getSecretChat(secret_chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetSecretChat", + secret_chat_id_ = secret_chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getSecretChat = getSecretChat + +-- Returns information about a chat by its identifier, offline request if current user is not a bot +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function getChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChat = getChat + +-- Returns information about a message +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat, message belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message to get +local function getMessage(chat_id, message_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getMessage = getMessage + +-- Returns information about messages. +-- If message is not found, returns null on the corresponding position of the result +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat, messages belongs to +-- @message_ids Identifiers of the messages to get +local function getMessages(chat_id, message_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetMessages", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_ids_ = message_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getMessages = getMessages + +-- Returns information about a file, offline request +-- @file_id Identifier of the file to get +local function getFile(file_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetFile", + file_id_ = file_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getFile = getFile + +-- Returns information about a file by its persistent id, offline request +-- @persistent_file_id Persistent identifier of the file to get +local function getFilePersistent(persistent_file_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetFilePersistent", + persistent_file_id_ = persistent_file_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getFilePersistent = getFilePersistent + +-- Returns list of chats in the right order, chats are sorted by (order, chat_id) in decreasing order. +-- For example, to get list of chats from the beginning, the offset_order should be equal 2^63 - 1 +-- @offset_order Chat order to return chats from +-- @offset_chat_id Chat identifier to return chats from +-- @limit Maximum number of chats to be returned +local function getChats(offset_order, offset_chat_id, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 20 then + limit = 20 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChats", + offset_order_ = offset_order or 9223372036854775807, + offset_chat_id_ = offset_chat_id or 0, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChats = getChats + +-- Searches public chat by its username. +-- Currently only private and channel chats can be public. +-- Returns chat if found, otherwise some error is returned +-- @username Username to be resolved +local function searchPublicChat(username, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchPublicChat", + username_ = username + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchPublicChat = searchPublicChat + +-- Searches public chats by prefix of their username. +-- Currently only private and channel (including supergroup) chats can be public. +-- Returns meaningful number of results. +-- Returns nothing if length of the searched username prefix is less than 5. +-- Excludes private chats with contacts from the results +-- @username_prefix Prefix of the username to search +local function searchPublicChats(username_prefix, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchPublicChats", + username_prefix_ = username_prefix + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchPublicChats = searchPublicChats + +-- Searches for specified query in the title and username of known chats, offline request. +-- Returns chats in the order of them in the chat list +-- @query Query to search for, if query is empty, returns up to 20 recently found chats +-- @limit Maximum number of chats to be returned +local function searchChats(query, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 20 then + limit = 20 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchChats", + query_ = query, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchChats = searchChats + +-- Adds chat to the list of recently found chats. +-- The chat is added to the beginning of the list. +-- If the chat is already in the list, at first it is removed from the list +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat to add +local function addRecentlyFoundChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AddRecentlyFoundChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.addRecentlyFoundChat = addRecentlyFoundChat + +-- Deletes chat from the list of recently found chats +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat to delete +local function deleteRecentlyFoundChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteRecentlyFoundChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteRecentlyFoundChat = deleteRecentlyFoundChat + +-- Clears list of recently found chats +local function deleteRecentlyFoundChats(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteRecentlyFoundChats", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteRecentlyFoundChats = deleteRecentlyFoundChats + +-- Returns list of common chats with an other given user. +-- Chats are sorted by their type and creation date +-- @user_id User identifier +-- @offset_chat_id Chat identifier to return chats from, use 0 for the first request +-- @limit Maximum number of chats to be returned, up to 100 +local function getCommonChats(user_id, offset_chat_id, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 100 then + limit = 100 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetCommonChats", + user_id_ = user_id, + offset_chat_id_ = offset_chat_id, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getCommonChats = getCommonChats + +-- Returns messages in a chat. +-- Automatically calls openChat. +-- Returns result in reverse chronological order, i.e. in order of decreasing message.message_id +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @from_message_id Identifier of the message near which we need a history, you can use 0 to get results from the beginning, i.e. from oldest to newest +-- @offset Specify 0 to get results exactly from from_message_id or negative offset to get specified message and some newer messages +-- @limit Maximum number of messages to be returned, should be positive and can't be greater than 100. +-- If offset is negative, limit must be greater than -offset. +-- There may be less than limit messages returned even the end of the history is not reached +local function getChatHistory(chat_id, from_message_id, offset, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 100 then + limit = 100 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChatHistory", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + from_message_id_ = from_message_id, + offset_ = offset or 0, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChatHistory = getChatHistory + +-- Deletes all messages in the chat. +-- Can't be used for channel chats +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @remove_from_chat_list Pass true, if chat should be removed from the chat list +local function deleteChatHistory(chat_id, remove_from_chat_list, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteChatHistory", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + remove_from_chat_list_ = remove_from_chat_list + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteChatHistory = deleteChatHistory + +-- Searches for messages with given words in the chat. +-- Returns result in reverse chronological order, i. e. in order of decreasimg message_id. +-- Doesn't work in secret chats +-- @chat_id Chat identifier to search in +-- @query Query to search for +-- @from_message_id Identifier of the message from which we need a history, you can use 0 to get results from beginning +-- @limit Maximum number of messages to be returned, can't be greater than 100 +-- @filter Filter for content of searched messages +-- filter = Empty|Animation|Audio|Document|Photo|Video|Voice|PhotoAndVideo|Url|ChatPhoto +local function searchChatMessages(chat_id, query, from_message_id, limit, filter, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 100 then + limit = 100 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchChatMessages", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + query_ = query, + from_message_id_ = from_message_id, + limit_ = limit, + filter_ = { + ID = 'SearchMessagesFilter' .. filter + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchChatMessages = searchChatMessages + +-- Searches for messages in all chats except secret chats. Returns result in reverse chronological order, i. e. in order of decreasing (date, chat_id, message_id) +-- @query Query to search for +-- @offset_date Date of the message to search from, you can use 0 or any date in the future to get results from the beginning +-- @offset_chat_id Chat identifier of the last found message or 0 for the first request +-- @offset_message_id Message identifier of the last found message or 0 for the first request +-- @limit Maximum number of messages to be returned, can't be greater than 100 +local function searchMessages(query, offset_date, offset_chat_id, offset_message_id, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 100 then + limit = 100 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchMessages", + query_ = query, + offset_date_ = offset_date, + offset_chat_id_ = offset_chat_id, + offset_message_id_ = offset_message_id, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchMessages = searchMessages + +-- Invites bot to a chat (if it is not in the chat) and send /start to it. +-- Bot can't be invited to a private chat other than chat with the bot. +-- Bots can't be invited to broadcast channel chats and secret chats. +-- Returns sent message. +-- UpdateChatTopMessage will not be sent, so returned message should be used to update chat top message +-- @bot_user_id Identifier of the bot +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat +-- @parameter Hidden parameter sent to bot for deep linking (https://api.telegram.org/bots#deep-linking) +-- parameter=start|startgroup or custom as defined by bot creator +local function sendBotStartMessage(bot_user_id, chat_id, parameter, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendBotStartMessage", + bot_user_id_ = bot_user_id, + chat_id_ = chat_id, + parameter_ = parameter + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendBotStartMessage = sendBotStartMessage + +-- Sends result of the inline query as a message. +-- Returns sent message. +-- UpdateChatTopMessage will not be sent, so returned message should be used to update chat top message. +-- Always clears chat draft message +-- @chat_id Chat to send message +-- @reply_to_message_id Identifier of a message to reply to or 0 +-- @disable_notification Pass true, to disable notification about the message, doesn't works in secret chats +-- @from_background Pass true, if the message is sent from background +-- @query_id Identifier of the inline query +-- @result_id Identifier of the inline result +local function sendInlineQueryResultMessage(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, query_id, result_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendInlineQueryResultMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + query_id_ = query_id, + result_id_ = result_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendInlineQueryResultMessage = sendInlineQueryResultMessage + +-- Forwards previously sent messages. +-- Returns forwarded messages in the same order as message identifiers passed in message_ids. +-- If message can't be forwarded, null will be returned instead of the message. +-- UpdateChatTopMessage will not be sent, so returned messages should be used to update chat top message +-- @chat_id Identifier of a chat to forward messages +-- @from_chat_id Identifier of a chat to forward from +-- @message_ids Identifiers of messages to forward +-- @disable_notification Pass true, to disable notification about the message, doesn't works if messages are forwarded to secret chat +-- @from_background Pass true, if the message is sent from background +local function forwardMessages(chat_id, from_chat_id, message_ids, disable_notification, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ForwardMessages", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + from_chat_id_ = from_chat_id, + message_ids_ = message_ids, -- vector + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = 1 + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.forwardMessages = forwardMessages + +-- Changes current ttl setting in a secret chat and sends corresponding message +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @ttl New value of ttl in seconds +local function sendChatSetTtlMessage(chat_id, ttl, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendChatSetTtlMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + ttl_ = ttl + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendChatSetTtlMessage = sendChatSetTtlMessage + +-- Deletes messages. +-- UpdateDeleteMessages will not be sent for messages deleted through that function +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @message_ids Identifiers of messages to delete +local function deleteMessages(chat_id, message_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteMessages", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_ids_ = message_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteMessages = deleteMessages + +-- Deletes all messages in the chat sent by the specified user. +-- Works only in supergroup channel chats, needs appropriate privileges +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @user_id User identifier +local function deleteMessagesFromUser(chat_id, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteMessagesFromUser", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteMessagesFromUser = deleteMessagesFromUser + +-- Edits text of text or game message. +-- Non-bots can edit message in a limited period of time. +-- Returns edited message after edit is complete server side +-- @chat_id Chat the message belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message +-- @reply_markup Bots only. New message reply markup +-- @input_message_content New text content of the message. Should be of type InputMessageText +local function editMessageText(chat_id, message_id, reply_markup, text, disable_web_page_preview, parse_mode, dl_cb, cmd) + local TextParseMode = getParseMode(parse_mode) + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditMessageText", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageText", + text_ = text, + disable_web_page_preview_ = disable_web_page_preview, + clear_draft_ = 0, + entities_ = {}, + parse_mode_ = TextParseMode, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editMessageText = editMessageText + +-- Edits message content caption. +-- Non-bots can edit message in a limited period of time. +-- Returns edited message after edit is complete server side +-- @chat_id Chat the message belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message +-- @reply_markup Bots only. New message reply markup +-- @caption New message content caption, 0-200 characters +local function editMessageCaption(chat_id, message_id, reply_markup, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditMessageCaption", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + caption_ = caption + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editMessageCaption = editMessageCaption + +-- Bots only. +-- Edits message reply markup. +-- Returns edited message after edit is complete server side +-- @chat_id Chat the message belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message +-- @reply_markup New message reply markup +local function editMessageReplyMarkup(inline_message_id, reply_markup, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditInlineMessageCaption", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + caption_ = caption + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editMessageReplyMarkup = editMessageReplyMarkup + +-- Bots only. +-- Edits text of an inline text or game message sent via bot +-- @inline_message_id Inline message identifier +-- @reply_markup New message reply markup +-- @input_message_content New text content of the message. Should be of type InputMessageText +local function editInlineMessageText(inline_message_id, reply_markup, text, disable_web_page_preview, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditInlineMessageText", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageText", + text_ = text, + disable_web_page_preview_ = disable_web_page_preview, + clear_draft_ = 0, + entities_ = {} + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editInlineMessageText = editInlineMessageText + +-- Bots only. +-- Edits caption of an inline message content sent via bot +-- @inline_message_id Inline message identifier +-- @reply_markup New message reply markup +-- @caption New message content caption, 0-200 characters +local function editInlineMessageCaption(inline_message_id, reply_markup, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditInlineMessageCaption", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + caption_ = caption + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editInlineMessageCaption = editInlineMessageCaption + +-- Bots only. +-- Edits reply markup of an inline message sent via bot +-- @inline_message_id Inline message identifier +-- @reply_markup New message reply markup +local function editInlineMessageReplyMarkup(inline_message_id, reply_markup, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "EditInlineMessageReplyMarkup", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup -- reply_markup:ReplyMarkup + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.editInlineMessageReplyMarkup = editInlineMessageReplyMarkup + + +-- Sends inline query to a bot and returns its results. +-- Unavailable for bots +-- @bot_user_id Identifier of the bot send query to +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat, where the query is sent +-- @user_location User location, only if needed +-- @query Text of the query +-- @offset Offset of the first entry to return +local function getInlineQueryResults(bot_user_id, chat_id, latitude, longitude, query, offset, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetInlineQueryResults", + bot_user_id_ = bot_user_id, + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_location_ = { + ID = "Location", + latitude_ = latitude, + longitude_ = longitude + }, + query_ = query, + offset_ = offset + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getInlineQueryResults = getInlineQueryResults + +-- Bots only. +-- Sets result of the inline query +-- @inline_query_id Identifier of the inline query +-- @is_personal Does result of the query can be cached only for specified user +-- @results Results of the query +-- @cache_time Allowed time to cache results of the query in seconds +-- @next_offset Offset for the next inline query, pass empty string if there is no more results +-- @switch_pm_text If non-empty, this text should be shown on the button, which opens private chat with the bot and sends bot start message with parameter switch_pm_parameter +-- @switch_pm_parameter Parameter for the bot start message +local function answerInlineQuery(inline_query_id, is_personal, cache_time, next_offset, switch_pm_text, switch_pm_parameter, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AnswerInlineQuery", + inline_query_id_ = inline_query_id, + is_personal_ = is_personal, + results_ = results, --vector<InputInlineQueryResult>, + cache_time_ = cache_time, + next_offset_ = next_offset, + switch_pm_text_ = switch_pm_text, + switch_pm_parameter_ = switch_pm_parameter + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.answerInlineQuery = answerInlineQuery + +-- Sends callback query to a bot and returns answer to it. +-- Unavailable for bots +-- @chat_id Identifier of the chat with a message +-- @message_id Identifier of the message, from which the query is originated +-- @payload Query payload +-- @text Text of the answer +-- @show_alert If true, an alert should be shown to the user instead of a toast +-- @url URL to be open +local function getCallbackQueryAnswer(chat_id, message_id, text, show_alert, url, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetCallbackQueryAnswer", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id, + payload_ = { + ID = "CallbackQueryAnswer", + text_ = text, + show_alert_ = show_alert, + url_ = url + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getCallbackQueryAnswer = getCallbackQueryAnswer + +-- Bots only. +-- Sets result of the callback query +-- @callback_query_id Identifier of the callback query +-- @text Text of the answer +-- @show_alert If true, an alert should be shown to the user instead of a toast +-- @url Url to be opened +-- @cache_time Allowed time to cache result of the query in seconds +local function answerCallbackQuery(callback_query_id, text, show_alert, url, cache_time, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AnswerCallbackQuery", + callback_query_id_ = callback_query_id, + text_ = text, + show_alert_ = show_alert, + url_ = url, + cache_time_ = cache_time + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.answerCallbackQuery = answerCallbackQuery + +-- Bots only. +-- Updates game score of the specified user in the game +-- @chat_id Chat a message with the game belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message +-- @edit_message True, if message should be edited +-- @user_id User identifier +-- @score New score +-- @force Pass True to update the score even if it decreases. If score is 0, user will be deleted from the high scores table +local function setGameScore(chat_id, message_id, edit_message, user_id, score, force, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetGameScore", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id, + edit_message_ = edit_message, + user_id_ = user_id, + score_ = score, + force_ = force + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setGameScore = setGameScore + +-- Bots only. +-- Updates game score of the specified user in the game +-- @inline_message_id Inline message identifier +-- @edit_message True, if message should be edited +-- @user_id User identifier +-- @score New score +-- @force Pass True to update the score even if it decreases. If score is 0, user will be deleted from the high scores table +local function setInlineGameScore(inline_message_id, edit_message, user_id, score, force, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetInlineGameScore", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + edit_message_ = edit_message, + user_id_ = user_id, + score_ = score, + force_ = force + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setInlineGameScore = setInlineGameScore + +-- Bots only. +-- Returns game high scores and some part of the score table around of the specified user in the game +-- @chat_id Chat a message with the game belongs to +-- @message_id Identifier of the message +-- @user_id User identifie +local function getGameHighScores(chat_id, message_id, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetGameHighScores", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id, + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getGameHighScores = getGameHighScores + +-- Bots only. +-- Returns game high scores and some part of the score table around of the specified user in the game +-- @inline_message_id Inline message identifier +-- @user_id User identifier +local function getInlineGameHighScores(inline_message_id, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetInlineGameHighScores", + inline_message_id_ = inline_message_id, + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getInlineGameHighScores = getInlineGameHighScores + +-- Deletes default reply markup from chat. +-- This method needs to be called after one-time keyboard or ForceReply reply markup has been used. +-- UpdateChatReplyMarkup will be send if reply markup will be changed +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @message_id Message identifier of used keyboard +local function deleteChatReplyMarkup(chat_id, message_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteChatReplyMarkup", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteChatReplyMarkup = deleteChatReplyMarkup + +-- Sends notification about user activity in a chat +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @action Action description +-- action = Typing|Cancel|RecordVideo|UploadVideo|RecordVoice|UploadVoice|UploadPhoto|UploadDocument|GeoLocation|ChooseContact|StartPlayGame +local function sendChatAction(chat_id, action, progress, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendChatAction", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + action_ = { + ID = "SendMessage" .. action .. "Action", + progress_ = progress or 100 + } + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendChatAction = sendChatAction + +-- Sends notification about screenshot taken in a chat. +-- Works only in secret chats +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function sendChatScreenshotTakenNotification(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendChatScreenshotTakenNotification", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendChatScreenshotTakenNotification = sendChatScreenshotTakenNotification + +-- Chat is opened by the user. +-- Many useful activities depends on chat being opened or closed. For example, in channels all updates are received only for opened chats +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function openChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "OpenChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.openChat = openChat + +-- Chat is closed by the user. +-- Many useful activities depends on chat being opened or closed. +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function closeChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CloseChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.closeChat = closeChat + +-- Messages are viewed by the user. +-- Many useful activities depends on message being viewed. For example, marking messages as read, incrementing of view counter, updating of view counter, removing of deleted messages in channels +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @message_ids Identifiers of viewed messages +local function viewMessages(chat_id, message_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ViewMessages", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_ids_ = message_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.viewMessages = viewMessages + +-- Message content is opened, for example the user has opened a photo, a video, a document, a location or a venue or have listened to an audio or a voice message +-- @chat_id Chat identifier of the message +-- @message_id Identifier of the message with opened content +local function openMessageContent(chat_id, message_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "OpenMessageContent", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.openMessageContent = openMessageContent + +-- Returns existing chat corresponding to the given user +-- @user_id User identifier +local function createPrivateChat(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreatePrivateChat", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createPrivateChat = createPrivateChat + +-- Returns existing chat corresponding to the known group +-- @group_id Group identifier +local function createGroupChat(group_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateGroupChat", + group_id_ = getChatId(group_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createGroupChat = createGroupChat + +-- Returns existing chat corresponding to the known channel +-- @channel_id Channel identifier +local function createChannelChat(channel_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateChannelChat", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createChannelChat = createChannelChat + +-- Returns existing chat corresponding to the known secret chat +-- @secret_chat_id SecretChat identifier +local function createSecretChat(secret_chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateSecretChat", + secret_chat_id_ = secret_chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createSecretChat = createSecretChat + +-- Creates new group chat and send corresponding messageGroupChatCreate, returns created chat +-- @user_ids Identifiers of users to add to the group +-- @title Title of new group chat, 0-255 characters +local function createNewGroupChat(user_ids, title, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateNewGroupChat", + user_ids_ = user_ids, -- vector + title_ = title + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createNewGroupChat = createNewGroupChat + +-- Creates new channel chat and send corresponding messageChannelChatCreate, returns created chat +-- @title Title of new channel chat, 0-255 characters +-- @is_supergroup True, if supergroup chat should be created +-- @about Information about the channel, 0-255 characters +local function createNewChannelChat(title, is_supergroup, about, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateNewChannelChat", + title_ = title, + is_supergroup_ = is_supergroup, + about_ = about + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createNewChannelChat = createNewChannelChat + +-- Creates new secret chat, returns created chat +-- @user_id Identifier of a user to create secret chat with +local function createNewSecretChat(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CreateNewSecretChat", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.createNewSecretChat = createNewSecretChat + +-- Creates new channel supergroup chat from existing group chat and send corresponding messageChatMigrateTo and messageChatMigrateFrom. Deactivates group +-- @chat_id Group chat identifier +local function migrateGroupChatToChannelChat(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "MigrateGroupChatToChannelChat", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.migrateGroupChatToChannelChat = migrateGroupChatToChannelChat + +-- Changes chat title. +-- Title can't be changed for private chats. +-- Title will not change until change will be synchronized with the server. +-- Title will not be changed if application is killed before it can send request to the server. +-- There will be update about change of the title on success. Otherwise error will be returned +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @title New title of a chat, 0-255 characters +local function changeChatTitle(chat_id, title, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChatTitle", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + title_ = title + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChatTitle = changeChatTitle + +-- Changes chat photo. +-- Photo can't be changed for private chats. +-- Photo will not change until change will be synchronized with the server. +-- Photo will not be changed if application is killed before it can send request to the server. +-- There will be update about change of the photo on success. Otherwise error will be returned +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @photo New chat photo. You can use zero InputFileId to delete photo. Files accessible only by HTTP URL are not acceptable +local function changeChatPhoto(chat_id, photo, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChatPhoto", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + photo_ = getInputFile(photo) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChatPhoto = changeChatPhoto + +-- Changes chat draft message +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @draft_message New draft message, nullable +local function changeChatDraftMessage(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, text, disable_web_page_preview, clear_draft, parse_mode, dl_cb, cmd) + local TextParseMode = getParseMode(parse_mode) + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChatDraftMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + draft_message_ = { + ID = "DraftMessage", + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + input_message_text_ = { + ID = "InputMessageText", + text_ = text, + disable_web_page_preview_ = disable_web_page_preview, + clear_draft_ = clear_draft, + entities_ = {}, + parse_mode_ = TextParseMode, + }, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChatDraftMessage = changeChatDraftMessage + +-- Adds new member to chat. +-- Members can't be added to private or secret chats. +-- Member will not be added until chat state will be synchronized with the server. +-- Member will not be added if application is killed before it can send request to the server +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @user_id Identifier of the user to add +-- @forward_limit Number of previous messages from chat to forward to new member, ignored for channel chats +local function addChatMember(chat_id, user_id, forward_limit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AddChatMember", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_id_ = user_id, + forward_limit_ = forward_limit or 50 + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.addChatMember = addChatMember + +-- Adds many new members to the chat. +-- Currently, available only for channels. +-- Can't be used to join the channel. +-- Member will not be added until chat state will be synchronized with the server. +-- Member will not be added if application is killed before it can send request to the server +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @user_ids Identifiers of the users to add +local function addChatMembers(chat_id, user_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AddChatMembers", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_ids_ = user_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.addChatMembers = addChatMembers + +-- Changes status of the chat member, need appropriate privileges. +-- In channel chats, user will be added to chat members if he is yet not a member and there is less than 200 members in the channel. +-- Status will not be changed until chat state will be synchronized with the server. +-- Status will not be changed if application is killed before it can send request to the server +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @user_id Identifier of the user to edit status, bots can be editors in the channel chats +-- @status New status of the member in the chat +-- status = Creator|Editor|Moderator|Member|Left|Kicked +local function changeChatMemberStatus(chat_id, user_id, status, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChatMemberStatus", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_id_ = user_id, + status_ = { + ID = "ChatMemberStatus" .. status + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChatMemberStatus = changeChatMemberStatus + +-- Returns information about one participant of the chat +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @user_id User identifier +local function getChatMember(chat_id, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChatMember", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChatMember = getChatMember + +-- Asynchronously downloads file from cloud. +-- Updates updateFileProgress will notify about download progress. +-- Update updateFile will notify about successful download +-- @file_id Identifier of file to download +local function downloadFile(file_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DownloadFile", + file_id_ = file_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.downloadFile = downloadFile + +-- Stops file downloading. +-- If file already downloaded do nothing. +-- @file_id Identifier of file to cancel download +local function cancelDownloadFile(file_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CancelDownloadFile", + file_id_ = file_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.cancelDownloadFile = cancelDownloadFile + +-- Next part of a file was generated +-- @generation_id Identifier of the generation process +-- @ready Number of bytes already generated. Negative number means that generation has failed and should be terminated +local function setFileGenerationProgress(generation_id, ready, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetFileGenerationProgress", + generation_id_ = generation_id, + ready_ = ready + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setFileGenerationProgress = setFileGenerationProgress + +-- Finishes file generation +-- @generation_id Identifier of the generation process +local function finishFileGeneration(generation_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "FinishFileGeneration", + generation_id_ = generation_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.finishFileGeneration = finishFileGeneration + +-- Generates new chat invite link, previously generated link is revoked. +-- Available for group and channel chats. +-- Only creator of the chat can export chat invite link +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function exportChatInviteLink(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ExportChatInviteLink", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.exportChatInviteLink = exportChatInviteLink + +-- Checks chat invite link for validness and returns information about the corresponding chat +-- @invite_link Invite link to check. Should begin with "https://telegram.me/joinchat/" +local function checkChatInviteLink(link, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CheckChatInviteLink", + invite_link_ = link + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.checkChatInviteLink = checkChatInviteLink + +-- Imports chat invite link, adds current user to a chat if possible. +-- Member will not be added until chat state will be synchronized with the server. +-- Member will not be added if application is killed before it can send request to the server +-- @invite_link Invite link to import. Should begin with "https://telegram.me/joinchat/" +local function importChatInviteLink(invite_link, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ImportChatInviteLink", + invite_link_ = invite_link + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.importChatInviteLink = importChatInviteLink + +-- Adds user to black list +-- @user_id User identifier +local function blockUser(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "BlockUser", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.blockUser = blockUser + +-- Removes user from black list +-- @user_id User identifier +local function unblockUser(user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "UnblockUser", + user_id_ = user_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.unblockUser = unblockUser + +-- Returns users blocked by the current user +-- @offset Number of users to skip in result, must be non-negative +-- @limit Maximum number of users to return, can't be greater than 100 +local function getBlockedUsers(offset, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetBlockedUsers", + offset_ = offset, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getBlockedUsers = getBlockedUsers + +-- Adds new contacts/edits existing contacts, contacts user identifiers are ignored. +-- Returns list of corresponding users in the same order as input contacts. +-- If contact doesn't registered in Telegram, user with id == 0 will be returned +-- @contacts List of contacts to import/edit +local function importContacts(phone_number, first_name, last_name, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ImportContacts", + contacts_ = {[0] = { + phone_number_ = tostring(phone_number), + first_name_ = tostring(first_name), + last_name_ = tostring(last_name), + user_id_ = user_id + }, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.importContacts = importContacts + +-- Searches for specified query in the first name, last name and username of the known user contacts +-- @query Query to search for, can be empty to return all contacts +-- @limit Maximum number of users to be returned +local function searchContacts(query, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchContacts", + query_ = query, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchContacts = searchContacts + +-- Deletes users from contacts list +-- @user_ids Identifiers of users to be deleted +local function deleteContacts(user_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteContacts", + user_ids_ = user_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteContacts = deleteContacts + +-- Returns profile photos of the user. +-- Result of this query can't be invalidated, so it must be used with care +-- @user_id User identifier +-- @offset Photos to skip, must be non-negative +-- @limit Maximum number of photos to be returned, can't be greater than 100 +local function getUserProfilePhotos(user_id, offset, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetUserProfilePhotos", + user_id_ = user_id, + offset_ = offset, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getUserProfilePhotos = getUserProfilePhotos + +-- Returns stickers corresponding to given emoji +-- @emoji String representation of emoji. If empty, returns all known stickers +local function getStickers(emoji, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetStickers", + emoji_ = emoji + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getStickers = getStickers + +-- Returns list of installed sticker sets without archived sticker sets +-- @is_masks Pass true to return masks, pass false to return stickers +local function getStickerSets(is_masks, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetStickerSets", + is_masks_ = is_masks + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getStickerSets = getStickerSets + +-- Returns list of archived sticker sets +-- @is_masks Pass true to return masks, pass false to return stickers +-- @offset_sticker_set_id Identifier of the sticker set from which return the result +-- @limit Maximum number of sticker sets to return +local function getArchivedStickerSets(is_masks, offset_sticker_set_id, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetArchivedStickerSets", + is_masks_ = is_masks, + offset_sticker_set_id_ = offset_sticker_set_id, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getArchivedStickerSets = getArchivedStickerSets + +-- Returns list of trending sticker sets +local function getTrendingStickerSets(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetTrendingStickerSets" + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getTrendingStickerSets = getTrendingStickerSets + +-- Returns list of sticker sets attached to a file, currently only photos and videos can have attached sticker sets +-- @file_id File identifier +local function getAttachedStickerSets(file_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetAttachedStickerSets", + file_id_ = file_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getAttachedStickerSets = getAttachedStickerSets + +-- Returns information about sticker set by its identifier +-- @set_id Identifier of the sticker set +local function getStickerSet(set_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetStickerSet", + set_id_ = set_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getStickerSet = getStickerSet + +-- Searches sticker set by its short name +-- @name Name of the sticker set +local function searchStickerSet(name, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SearchStickerSet", + name_ = name + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.searchStickerSet = searchStickerSet + +-- Installs/uninstalls or enables/archives sticker set. +-- Official sticker set can't be uninstalled, but it can be archived +-- @set_id Identifier of the sticker set +-- @is_installed New value of is_installed +-- @is_archived New value of is_archived +local function updateStickerSet(set_id, is_installed, is_archived, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "UpdateStickerSet", + set_id_ = set_id, + is_installed_ = is_installed, + is_archived_ = is_archived + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.updateStickerSet = updateStickerSet + +-- Trending sticker sets are viewed by the user +-- @sticker_set_ids Identifiers of viewed trending sticker sets +local function viewTrendingStickerSets(sticker_set_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ViewTrendingStickerSets", + sticker_set_ids_ = sticker_set_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.viewTrendingStickerSets = viewTrendingStickerSets + +-- Changes the order of installed sticker sets +-- @is_masks Pass true to change masks order, pass false to change stickers order +-- @sticker_set_ids Identifiers of installed sticker sets in the new right order +local function reorderStickerSets(is_masks, sticker_set_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ReorderStickerSets", + is_masks_ = is_masks, + sticker_set_ids_ = sticker_set_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.reorderStickerSets = reorderStickerSets + +-- Returns list of recently used stickers +-- @is_attached Pass true to return stickers and masks recently attached to photo or video files, pass false to return recently sent stickers +local function getRecentStickers(is_attached, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetRecentStickers", + is_attached_ = is_attached + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getRecentStickers = getRecentStickers + +-- Manually adds new sticker to the list of recently used stickers. +-- New sticker is added to the beginning of the list. +-- If the sticker is already in the list, at first it is removed from the list +-- @is_attached Pass true to add the sticker to the list of stickers recently attached to photo or video files, pass false to add the sticker to the list of recently sent stickers +-- @sticker Sticker file to add +local function addRecentSticker(is_attached, sticker, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AddRecentSticker", + is_attached_ = is_attached, + sticker_ = getInputFile(sticker) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.addRecentSticker = addRecentSticker + +-- Removes a sticker from the list of recently used stickers +-- @is_attached Pass true to remove the sticker from the list of stickers recently attached to photo or video files, pass false to remove the sticker from the list of recently sent stickers +-- @sticker Sticker file to delete +local function deleteRecentSticker(is_attached, sticker, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteRecentSticker", + is_attached_ = is_attached, + sticker_ = getInputFile(sticker) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteRecentSticker = deleteRecentSticker + +-- Clears list of recently used stickers +-- @is_attached Pass true to clear list of stickers recently attached to photo or video files, pass false to clear the list of recently sent stickers +local function clearRecentStickers(is_attached, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ClearRecentStickers", + is_attached_ = is_attached + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.clearRecentStickers = clearRecentStickers + +-- Returns emojis corresponding to a sticker +-- @sticker Sticker file identifier +local function getStickerEmojis(sticker, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetStickerEmojis", + sticker_ = getInputFile(sticker) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getStickerEmojis = getStickerEmojis + +-- Returns saved animations +local function getSavedAnimations(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetSavedAnimations", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getSavedAnimations = getSavedAnimations + +-- Manually adds new animation to the list of saved animations. +-- New animation is added to the beginning of the list. +-- If the animation is already in the list, at first it is removed from the list. +-- Only non-secret video animations with MIME type "video/mp4" can be added to the list +-- @animation Animation file to add. Only known to server animations (i. e. successfully sent via message) can be added to the list +local function addSavedAnimation(animation, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "AddSavedAnimation", + animation_ = getInputFile(animation) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.addSavedAnimation = addSavedAnimation + +-- Removes animation from the list of saved animations +-- @animation Animation file to delete +local function deleteSavedAnimation(animation, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteSavedAnimation", + animation_ = getInputFile(animation) + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteSavedAnimation = deleteSavedAnimation + +-- Returns up to 20 recently used inline bots in the order of the last usage +local function getRecentInlineBots(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetRecentInlineBots", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getRecentInlineBots = getRecentInlineBots + +-- Get web page preview by text of the message. +-- Do not call this function to often +-- @message_text Message text +local function getWebPagePreview(message_text, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetWebPagePreview", + message_text_ = message_text + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getWebPagePreview = getWebPagePreview + +-- Returns notification settings for a given scope +-- @scope Scope to return information about notification settings +-- scope = Chat(chat_id)|PrivateChats|GroupChats|AllChats| +local function getNotificationSettings(scope, chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetNotificationSettings", + scope_ = { + ID = 'NotificationSettingsFor' .. scope, + chat_id_ = chat_id or nil + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getNotificationSettings = getNotificationSettings + +-- Changes notification settings for a given scope +-- @scope Scope to change notification settings +-- @notification_settings New notification settings for given scope +-- scope = Chat(chat_id)|PrivateChats|GroupChats|AllChats| +local function setNotificationSettings(scope, chat_id, mute_for, show_preview, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetNotificationSettings", + scope_ = { + ID = 'NotificationSettingsFor' .. scope, + chat_id_ = chat_id or nil + }, + notification_settings_ = { + ID = "NotificationSettings", + mute_for_ = mute_for, + sound_ = "default", + show_preview_ = show_preview + } + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setNotificationSettings = setNotificationSettings + +-- Resets all notification settings to the default value. +-- By default the only muted chats are supergroups, sound is set to 'default' and message previews are showed +local function resetAllNotificationSettings(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ResetAllNotificationSettings" + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.resetAllNotificationSettings = resetAllNotificationSettings + +-- Uploads new profile photo for logged in user. +-- Photo will not change until change will be synchronized with the server. +-- Photo will not be changed if application is killed before it can send request to the server. +-- If something changes, updateUser will be sent +-- @photo_path Path to new profile photo +local function setProfilePhoto(photo_path, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetProfilePhoto", + photo_path_ = photo_path + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setProfilePhoto = setProfilePhoto + +-- Deletes profile photo. +-- If something changes, updateUser will be sent +-- @profile_photo_id Identifier of profile photo to delete +local function deleteProfilePhoto(profile_photo_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteProfilePhoto", + profile_photo_id_ = profile_photo_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteProfilePhoto = deleteProfilePhoto + +-- Changes first and last names of logged in user. +-- If something changes, updateUser will be sent +-- @first_name New value of user first name, 1-255 characters +-- @last_name New value of optional user last name, 0-255 characters +local function changeName(first_name, last_name, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeName", + first_name_ = first_name, + last_name_ = last_name + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeName = changeName + +-- Changes about information of logged in user +-- @about New value of userFull.about, 0-255 characters +local function changeAbout(about, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeAbout", + about_ = about + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeAbout = changeAbout + +-- Changes username of logged in user. +-- If something changes, updateUser will be sent +-- @username New value of username. Use empty string to remove username +local function changeUsername(username, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeUsername", + username_ = username + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeUsername = changeUsername + +-- Changes user's phone number and sends authentication code to the new user's phone number. +-- Returns authStateWaitCode with information about sent code on success +-- @phone_number New user's phone number in any reasonable format +-- @allow_flash_call Pass True, if code can be sent via flash call to the specified phone number +-- @is_current_phone_number Pass true, if the phone number is used on the current device. Ignored if allow_flash_call is False +local function changePhoneNumber(phone_number, allow_flash_call, is_current_phone_number, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangePhoneNumber", + phone_number_ = phone_number, + allow_flash_call_ = allow_flash_call, + is_current_phone_number_ = is_current_phone_number + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changePhoneNumber = changePhoneNumber + +-- Resends authentication code sent to change user's phone number. +-- Works only if in previously received authStateWaitCode next_code_type was not null. +-- Returns authStateWaitCode on success +local function resendChangePhoneNumberCode(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ResendChangePhoneNumberCode", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.resendChangePhoneNumberCode = resendChangePhoneNumberCode + +-- Checks authentication code sent to change user's phone number. +-- Returns authStateOk on success +-- @code Verification code from SMS, voice call or flash call +local function checkChangePhoneNumberCode(code, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CheckChangePhoneNumberCode", + code_ = code + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.checkChangePhoneNumberCode = checkChangePhoneNumberCode + +-- Returns all active sessions of logged in user +local function getActiveSessions(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetActiveSessions", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getActiveSessions = getActiveSessions + +-- Terminates another session of logged in user +-- @session_id Session identifier +local function terminateSession(session_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "TerminateSession", + session_id_ = session_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.terminateSession = terminateSession + +-- Terminates all other sessions of logged in user +local function terminateAllOtherSessions(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "TerminateAllOtherSessions", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.terminateAllOtherSessions = terminateAllOtherSessions + +-- Gives or revokes all members of the group editor rights. +-- Needs creator privileges in the group +-- @group_id Identifier of the group +-- @anyone_can_edit New value of anyone_can_edit +local function toggleGroupEditors(group_id, anyone_can_edit, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ToggleGroupEditors", + group_id_ = getChatId(group_id).ID, + anyone_can_edit_ = anyone_can_edit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.toggleGroupEditors = toggleGroupEditors + +-- Changes username of the channel. +-- Needs creator privileges in the channel +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @username New value of username. Use empty string to remove username +local function changeChannelUsername(channel_id, username, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChannelUsername", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + username_ = username + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChannelUsername = changeChannelUsername + +-- Gives or revokes right to invite new members to all current members of the channel. +-- Needs creator privileges in the channel. +-- Available only for supergroups +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @anyone_can_invite New value of anyone_can_invite +local function toggleChannelInvites(channel_id, anyone_can_invite, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ToggleChannelInvites", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + anyone_can_invite_ = anyone_can_invite + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.toggleChannelInvites = toggleChannelInvites + +-- Enables or disables sender signature on sent messages in the channel. +-- Needs creator privileges in the channel. +-- Not available for supergroups +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @sign_messages New value of sign_messages +local function toggleChannelSignMessages(channel_id, sign_messages, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ToggleChannelSignMessages", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + sign_messages_ = sign_messages + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.toggleChannelSignMessages = toggleChannelSignMessages + +-- Changes information about the channel. +-- Needs creator privileges in the broadcast channel or editor privileges in the supergroup channel +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @about New value of about, 0-255 characters +local function changeChannelAbout(channel_id, about, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChannelAbout", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + about_ = about + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChannelAbout = changeChannelAbout + +-- Pins a message in a supergroup channel chat. +-- Needs editor privileges in the channel +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @message_id Identifier of the new pinned message +-- @disable_notification True, if there should be no notification about the pinned message +local function pinChannelMessage(channel_id, message_id, disable_notification, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "PinChannelMessage", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + message_id_ = message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.pinChannelMessage = pinChannelMessage + +-- Removes pinned message in the supergroup channel. +-- Needs editor privileges in the channel +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +local function unpinChannelMessage(channel_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "UnpinChannelMessage", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.unpinChannelMessage = unpinChannelMessage + +-- Reports some supergroup channel messages from a user as spam messages +-- @channel_id Channel identifier +-- @user_id User identifier +-- @message_ids Identifiers of messages sent in the supergroup by the user, the list should be non-empty +local function reportChannelSpam(channel_id, user_id, message_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ReportChannelSpam", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + user_id_ = user_id, + message_ids_ = message_ids -- vector + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.reportChannelSpam = reportChannelSpam + +-- Returns information about channel members or kicked from channel users. +-- Can be used only if channel_full->can_get_members == true +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +-- @filter Kind of channel users to return, defaults to channelMembersRecent +-- @offset Number of channel users to skip +-- @limit Maximum number of users be returned, can't be greater than 200 +-- filter = Recent|Administrators|Kicked|Bots +local function getChannelMembers(channel_id, offset, filter, limit, dl_cb, cmd) + if not limit or limit > 200 then + limit = 200 + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChannelMembers", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID, + filter_ = { + ID = "ChannelMembers" .. filter + }, + offset_ = offset, + limit_ = limit + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChannelMembers = getChannelMembers + +-- Deletes channel along with all messages in corresponding chat. +-- Releases channel username and removes all members. +-- Needs creator privileges in the channel. +-- Channels with more than 1000 members can't be deleted +-- @channel_id Identifier of the channel +local function deleteChannel(channel_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteChannel", + channel_id_ = getChatId(channel_id).ID + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteChannel = deleteChannel + +-- Returns list of created public channels +local function getCreatedPublicChannels(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetCreatedPublicChannels" + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getCreatedPublicChannels = getCreatedPublicChannels + +-- Closes secret chat +-- @secret_chat_id Secret chat identifier +local function closeSecretChat(secret_chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "CloseSecretChat", + secret_chat_id_ = secret_chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.closeSecretChat = closeSecretChat + +-- Returns user that can be contacted to get support +local function getSupportUser(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetSupportUser", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getSupportUser = getSupportUser + +-- Returns background wallpapers +local function getWallpapers(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetWallpapers", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getWallpapers = getWallpapers + +-- Registers current used device for receiving push notifications +-- @device_token Device token +-- device_token = apns|gcm|mpns|simplePush|ubuntuPhone|blackberry +local function registerDevice(device_token, token, device_token_set, dl_cb, cmd) + local dToken = {ID = device_token .. 'DeviceToken', token_ = token} + + if device_token_set then + dToken = {ID = "DeviceTokenSet", token_ = device_token_set} -- tokens:vector<DeviceToken> + end + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "RegisterDevice", + device_token_ = dToken + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.registerDevice = registerDevice + +-- Returns list of used device tokens +local function getDeviceTokens(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetDeviceTokens", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getDeviceTokens = getDeviceTokens + +-- Changes privacy settings +-- @key Privacy key +-- @rules New privacy rules +-- @privacyKeyUserStatus Privacy key for managing visibility of the user status +-- @privacyKeyChatInvite Privacy key for managing ability of invitation of the user to chats +-- @privacyRuleAllowAll Rule to allow all users +-- @privacyRuleAllowContacts Rule to allow all user contacts +-- @privacyRuleAllowUsers Rule to allow specified users +-- @user_ids User identifiers +-- @privacyRuleDisallowAll Rule to disallow all users +-- @privacyRuleDisallowContacts Rule to disallow all user contacts +-- @privacyRuleDisallowUsers Rule to disallow all specified users +-- key = UserStatus|ChatInvite +-- rules = AllowAll|AllowContacts|AllowUsers(user_ids)|DisallowAll|DisallowContacts|DisallowUsers(user_ids) +local function setPrivacy(key, rule, allowed_user_ids, disallowed_user_ids, dl_cb, cmd) + local rules = {[0] = {ID = 'PrivacyRule' .. rule}} + + if allowed_user_ids then + rules = { + { + ID = 'PrivacyRule' .. rule + }, + [0] = { + ID = "PrivacyRuleAllowUsers", + user_ids_ = allowed_user_ids -- vector + }, + } + end + if disallowed_user_ids then + rules = { + { + ID = 'PrivacyRule' .. rule + }, + [0] = { + ID = "PrivacyRuleDisallowUsers", + user_ids_ = disallowed_user_ids -- vector + }, + } + end + if allowed_user_ids and disallowed_user_ids then + rules = { + { + ID = 'PrivacyRule' .. rule + }, + { + ID = "PrivacyRuleAllowUsers", + user_ids_ = allowed_user_ids + }, + [0] = { + ID = "PrivacyRuleDisallowUsers", + user_ids_ = disallowed_user_ids + }, + } + end + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetPrivacy", + key_ = { + ID = 'PrivacyKey' .. key + }, + rules_ = { + ID = "PrivacyRules", + rules_ = rules + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setPrivacy = setPrivacy + +-- Returns current privacy settings +-- @key Privacy key +-- key = UserStatus|ChatInvite +local function getPrivacy(key, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetPrivacy", + key_ = { + ID = "PrivacyKey" .. key + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getPrivacy = getPrivacy + +-- Returns value of an option by its name. +-- See list of available options on https://core.telegram.org/tdlib/options +-- @name Name of the option +local function getOption(name, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetOption", + name_ = name + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getOption = getOption + +-- Sets value of an option. +-- See list of available options on https://core.telegram.org/tdlib/options. +-- Only writable options can be set +-- @name Name of the option +-- @value New value of the option +local function setOption(name, option, value, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetOption", + name_ = name, + value_ = { + ID = 'Option' .. option, + value_ = value + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setOption = setOption + +-- Changes period of inactivity, after which the account of currently logged in user will be automatically deleted +-- @ttl New account TTL +local function changeAccountTtl(days, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeAccountTtl", + ttl_ = { + ID = "AccountTtl", + days_ = days + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeAccountTtl = changeAccountTtl + +-- Returns period of inactivity, after which the account of currently logged in user will be automatically deleted +local function getAccountTtl(dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetAccountTtl", + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getAccountTtl = getAccountTtl + +-- Deletes the account of currently logged in user, deleting from the server all information associated with it. +-- Account's phone number can be used to create new account, but only once in two weeks +-- @reason Optional reason of account deletion +local function deleteAccount(reason, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "DeleteAccount", + reason_ = reason + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.deleteAccount = deleteAccount + +-- Returns current chat report spam state +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +local function getChatReportSpamState(chat_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "GetChatReportSpamState", + chat_id_ = chat_id + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.getChatReportSpamState = getChatReportSpamState + +-- Reports chat as a spam chat or as not a spam chat. +-- Can be used only if ChatReportSpamState.can_report_spam is true. +-- After this request ChatReportSpamState.can_report_spam became false forever +-- @chat_id Chat identifier +-- @is_spam_chat If true, chat will be reported as a spam chat, otherwise it will be marked as not a spam chat +local function changeChatReportSpamState(chat_id, is_spam_chat, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "ChangeChatReportSpamState", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + is_spam_chat_ = is_spam_chat + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.changeChatReportSpamState = changeChatReportSpamState + +-- Bots only. +-- Informs server about number of pending bot updates if they aren't processed for a long time +-- @pending_update_count Number of pending updates +-- @error_message Last error's message +local function setBotUpdatesStatus(pending_update_count, error_message, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetBotUpdatesStatus", + pending_update_count_ = pending_update_count, + error_message_ = error_message + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setBotUpdatesStatus = setBotUpdatesStatus + +-- Returns Ok after specified amount of the time passed +-- @seconds Number of seconds before that function returns +local function setAlarm(seconds, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SetAlarm", + seconds_ = seconds + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.setAlarm = setAlarm + +-- Text message +-- @text Text to send +-- @disable_notification Pass true, to disable notification about the message, doesn't works in secret chats +-- @from_background Pass true, if the message is sent from background +-- @reply_markup Bots only. Markup for replying to message +-- @disable_web_page_preview Pass true to disable rich preview for link in the message text +-- @clear_draft Pass true if chat draft message should be deleted +-- @entities Bold, Italic, Code, Pre, PreCode and TextUrl entities contained in the text. Non-bot users can't use TextUrl entities. Can't be used with non-null parse_mode +-- @parse_mode Text parse mode, nullable. Can't be used along with enitities +local function sendMessage(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, text, disable_web_page_preview, parse_mode) + local TextParseMode = getParseMode(parse_mode) + + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = 1, + reply_markup_ = nil, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageText", + text_ = text, + disable_web_page_preview_ = disable_web_page_preview, + clear_draft_ = 0, + entities_ = {}, + parse_mode_ = TextParseMode, + }, + }, dl_cb, nil) +end + +M.sendMessage = sendMessage + +-- Animation message +-- @animation Animation file to send +-- @thumb Animation thumb, if available +-- @width Width of the animation, may be replaced by the server +-- @height Height of the animation, may be replaced by the server +-- @caption Animation caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendAnimation(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, animation, width, height, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageAnimation", + animation_ = getInputFile(animation), + --thumb_ = { + --ID = "InputThumb", + --path_ = path, + --width_ = width, + --height_ = height + --}, + width_ = width or '', + height_ = height or '', + caption_ = caption or '' + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendAnimation = sendAnimation + +-- Audio message +-- @audio Audio file to send +-- @album_cover_thumb Thumb of the album's cover, if available +-- @duration Duration of audio in seconds, may be replaced by the server +-- @title Title of the audio, 0-64 characters, may be replaced by the server +-- @performer Performer of the audio, 0-64 characters, may be replaced by the server +-- @caption Audio caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendAudio(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, audio, duration, title, performer, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageAudio", + audio_ = getInputFile(audio), + --album_cover_thumb_ = { + --ID = "InputThumb", + --path_ = path, + --width_ = width, + --height_ = height + --}, + duration_ = duration or '', + title_ = title or '', + performer_ = performer or '', + caption_ = caption or '' + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendAudio = sendAudio + +-- Document message +-- @document Document to send +-- @thumb Document thumb, if available +-- @caption Document caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendDocument(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, document, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageDocument", + document_ = getInputFile(document), + --thumb_ = { + --ID = "InputThumb", + --path_ = path, + --width_ = width, + --height_ = height + --}, + caption_ = caption + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendDocument = sendDocument + +-- Photo message +-- @photo Photo to send +-- @caption Photo caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendPhoto(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, photo, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessagePhoto", + photo_ = getInputFile(photo), + added_sticker_file_ids_ = {}, + width_ = 0, + height_ = 0, + caption_ = caption + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendPhoto = sendPhoto + +-- Sticker message +-- @sticker Sticker to send +-- @thumb Sticker thumb, if available +local function sendSticker(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, sticker, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageSticker", + sticker_ = getInputFile(sticker), + --thumb_ = { + --ID = "InputThumb", + --path_ = path, + --width_ = width, + --height_ = height + --}, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendSticker = sendSticker + +-- Video message +-- @video Video to send +-- @thumb Video thumb, if available +-- @duration Duration of video in seconds +-- @width Video width +-- @height Video height +-- @caption Video caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendVideo(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, video, duration, width, height, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageVideo", + video_ = getInputFile(video), + --thumb_ = { + --ID = "InputThumb", + --path_ = path, + --width_ = width, + --height_ = height + --}, + added_sticker_file_ids_ = {}, + duration_ = duration or '', + width_ = width or '', + height_ = height or '', + caption_ = caption or '' + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendVideo = sendVideo + +-- Voice message +-- @voice Voice file to send +-- @duration Duration of voice in seconds +-- @waveform Waveform representation of the voice in 5-bit format +-- @caption Voice caption, 0-200 characters +local function sendVoice(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, voice, duration, waveform, caption, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageVoice", + voice_ = getInputFile(voice), + duration_ = duration or '', + waveform_ = waveform or '', + caption_ = caption or '' + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendVoice = sendVoice + +-- Message with location +-- @latitude Latitude of location in degrees as defined by sender +-- @longitude Longitude of location in degrees as defined by sender +local function sendLocation(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, latitude, longitude, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageLocation", + location_ = { + ID = "Location", + latitude_ = latitude, + longitude_ = longitude + }, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendLocation = sendLocation + +-- Message with information about venue +-- @venue Venue to send +-- @latitude Latitude of location in degrees as defined by sender +-- @longitude Longitude of location in degrees as defined by sender +-- @title Venue name as defined by sender +-- @address Venue address as defined by sender +-- @provider Provider of venue database as defined by sender. Only "foursquare" need to be supported currently +-- @id Identifier of the venue in provider database as defined by sender +local function sendVenue(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, latitude, longitude, title, address, id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageVenue", + venue_ = { + ID = "Venue", + location_ = { + ID = "Location", + latitude_ = latitude, + longitude_ = longitude + }, + title_ = title, + address_ = address, + provider_ = 'foursquare', + id_ = id + }, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendVenue = sendVenue + +-- User contact message +-- @contact Contact to send +-- @phone_number User's phone number +-- @first_name User first name, 1-255 characters +-- @last_name User last name +-- @user_id User identifier if known, 0 otherwise +local function sendContact(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, phone_number, first_name, last_name, user_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageContact", + contact_ = { + ID = "Contact", + phone_number_ = phone_number, + first_name_ = first_name, + last_name_ = last_name, + user_id_ = user_id + }, + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendContact = sendContact + +-- Message with a game +-- @bot_user_id User identifier of a bot owned the game +-- @game_short_name Game short name +local function sendGame(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, bot_user_id, game_short_name, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageGame", + bot_user_id_ = bot_user_id, + game_short_name_ = game_short_name + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendGame = sendGame + +-- Forwarded message +-- @from_chat_id Chat identifier of the message to forward +-- @message_id Identifier of the message to forward +local function sendForwarded(chat_id, reply_to_message_id, disable_notification, from_background, reply_markup, from_chat_id, message_id, dl_cb, cmd) + tdcli_function ({ + ID = "SendMessage", + chat_id_ = chat_id, + reply_to_message_id_ = reply_to_message_id, + disable_notification_ = disable_notification, + from_background_ = from_background, + reply_markup_ = reply_markup, + input_message_content_ = { + ID = "InputMessageForwarded", + from_chat_id_ = from_chat_id, + message_id_ = message_id + }, + }, dl_cb, cmd) +end + +M.sendForwarded = sendForwarded + +return M cli/tg/tgcli (Binary file not shown.) 0 comments on commit 3233fdf Comment on 3233fdf Leave a comment Comment Desktop version

 [](https://search.maven.org/search?q=g:net.openid%20appauth) [](http://javadoc.io/doc/net.openid/appauth) [](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/actions/workflows/build.yml) [](https://codecov.io/github/openid/AppAuth-Android?branch=master) AppAuth for Android is a client SDK for communicating with [OAuth 2.0](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6749) and [OpenID Connect](http://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-core-1_0.html) providers. It strives to directly map the requests and responses of those specifications, while following the idiomatic style of the implementation language. In addition to mapping the raw protocol flows, convenience methods are available to assist with common tasks like performing an action with fresh tokens. The library follows the best practices set out in [RFC 8252 - OAuth 2.0 for Native Apps](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc8252), including using [Custom Tabs](https://developer.chrome.com/multidevice/android/customtabs) for authorization requests. For this reason, `WebView` is explicitly *not* supported due to usability and security reasons. The library also supports the [PKCE](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7636) extension to OAuth which was created to secure authorization codes in public clients when custom URI scheme redirects are used. The library is friendly to other extensions (standard or otherwise) with the ability to handle additional parameters in all protocol requests and responses. A talk providing an overview of using the library for enterprise single sign-on (produced by Google) can be found here: [Enterprise SSO with Chrome Custom Tabs](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DdQTXrk6YTk). ## Download AppAuth for Android is available on [MavenCentral](https://search.maven.org/search?q=g:net.openid%20appauth) ```groovy implementation 'net.openid:appauth:<version>' ``` ## Requirements AppAuth supports Android API 16 (Jellybean) and above. Browsers which provide a custom tabs implementation are preferred by the library, but not required. Both Custom URI Schemes (all supported versions of Android) and App Links (Android M / API 23+) can be used with the library. In general, AppAuth can work with any Authorization Server (AS) that supports native apps as documented in [RFC 8252](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc8252), either through custom URI scheme redirects, or App Links. AS's that assume all clients are web-based or require clients to maintain confidentiality of the client secrets may not work well. ## Demo app A demo app is contained within this repository. For instructions on how to build and configure this app, see the [demo app readme](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/app/README.md). ## Conceptual overview AppAuth encapsulates the authorization state of the user in the [net.openid.appauth.AuthState](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthState.java) class, and communicates with an authorization server through the use of the [net.openid.appauth.AuthorizationService](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationService.java) class. AuthState is designed to be easily persistable as a JSON string, using the storage mechanism of your choice (e.g. [SharedPreferences](https://developer.android.com/training/basics/data-storage/shared-preferences.html), [sqlite](https://developer.android.com/training/basics/data-storage/databases.html), or even just [in a file](https://developer.android.com/training/basics/data-storage/files.html)). AppAuth provides data classes which are intended to model the OAuth2 specification as closely as possible; this provides the greatest flexibility in interacting with a wide variety of OAuth2 and OpenID Connect implementations. Authorizing the user occurs via the user's web browser, and the request is described using instances of [AuthorizationRequest](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationRequest.java). The request is dispatched using [performAuthorizationRequest()](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationService.java#L159) on an AuthorizationService instance, and the response (an [AuthorizationResponse](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationResponse.java) instance) will be dispatched to the activity of your choice, expressed via an Intent. Token requests, such as obtaining a new access token using a refresh token, follow a similar pattern: [TokenRequest](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/TokenRequest.java) instances are dispatched using [performTokenRequest()](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationService.java#L252) on an AuthorizationService instance, and a [TokenResponse](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/TokenResponse.java) instance is returned via a callback. Responses can be provided to the [update()](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthState.java#L367) methods on AuthState in order to track and persist changes to the authorization state. Once in an authorized state, the [performActionWithFreshTokens()](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthState.java#L449) method on AuthState can be used to automatically refresh access tokens as necessary before performing actions that require valid tokens. ## Implementing the authorization code flow It is recommended that native apps use the [authorization code](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6749#section-1.3.1) flow with a public client to gain authorization to access user data. This has the primary advantage for native clients that the authorization flow, which must occur in a browser, only needs to be performed once. This flow is effectively composed of four stages: 1. Discovering or specifying the endpoints to interact with the provider. 2. Authorizing the user, via a browser, in order to obtain an authorization code. 3. Exchanging the authorization code with the authorization server, to obtain a refresh token and/or ID token. 4. Using access tokens derived from the refresh token to interact with a resource server for further access to user data. At each step of the process, an AuthState instance can (optionally) be updated with the result to help with tracking the state of the flow. ### Authorization service configuration First, AppAuth must be instructed how to interact with the authorization service. This can be done either by directly creating an [AuthorizationServiceConfiguration](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.java#L102) instance, or by retrieving an OpenID Connect discovery document. Directly specifying an AuthorizationServiceConfiguration involves providing the URIs of the authorization endpoint and token endpoint, and optionally a dynamic client registration endpoint (see "Dynamic client registration" for more info): ```java AuthorizationServiceConfiguration serviceConfig = new AuthorizationServiceConfiguration( Uri.parse("https://idp.example.com/auth"), // authorization endpoint Uri.parse("https://idp.example.com/token")); // token endpoint ``` Where available, using an OpenID Connect discovery document is preferable: ```java AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.fetchFromIssuer( Uri.parse("https://idp.example.com"), new AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.RetrieveConfigurationCallback() { public void onFetchConfigurationCompleted( @Nullable AuthorizationServiceConfiguration serviceConfiguration, @Nullable AuthorizationException ex) { if (ex != null) { Log.e(TAG, "failed to fetch configuration"); return; } // use serviceConfiguration as needed } }); ``` This will attempt to download a discovery document from the standard location under this base URI, `https://idp.example.com/.well-known/openid-configuration`. If the discovery document for your IDP is in some other non-standard location, you can instead provide the full URI as follows: ```java AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.fetchFromUrl( Uri.parse("https://idp.example.com/exampletenant/openid-config"), new AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.RetrieveConfigurationCallback() { ... } }); ``` If desired, this configuration can be used to seed an AuthState instance, to persist the configuration easily: ```java AuthState authState = new AuthState(serviceConfig); ``` ### Obtaining an authorization code An authorization code can now be acquired by constructing an AuthorizationRequest, using its Builder. In AppAuth, the builders for each data class accept the mandatory parameters via the builder constructor: ```java AuthorizationRequest.Builder authRequestBuilder = new AuthorizationRequest.Builder( serviceConfig, // the authorization service configuration MY_CLIENT_ID, // the client ID, typically pre-registered and static ResponseTypeValues.CODE, // the response_type value: we want a code MY_REDIRECT_URI); // the redirect URI to which the auth response is sent ``` Other optional parameters, such as the OAuth2 [scope string](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6749#section-3.3) or OpenID Connect [login hint](http://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-core-1_0.html#rfc.section.3.1.2.1) are specified through set methods on the builder: ```java AuthorizationRequest authRequest = authRequestBuilder .setScope("openid email profile https://idp.example.com/custom-scope") .setLoginHint("jdoe@user.example.com") .build(); ``` This request can then be dispatched using one of two approaches. a `startActivityForResult` call using an Intent returned from the `AuthorizationService`, or by calling `performAuthorizationRequest` and providing pending intent for completion and cancelation handling activities. The `startActivityForResult` approach is simpler to use but may require more processing of the result: ```java private void doAuthorization() { AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(this); Intent authIntent = authService.getAuthorizationRequestIntent(authRequest); startActivityForResult(authIntent, RC_AUTH); } @Override protected void onActivityResult(int requestCode, int resultCode, Intent data) { if (requestCode == RC_AUTH) { AuthorizationResponse resp = AuthorizationResponse.fromIntent(data); AuthorizationException ex = AuthorizationException.fromIntent(data); // ... process the response or exception ... } else { // ... } } ``` If instead you wish to directly transition to another activity on completion or cancelation, you can use `performAuthorizationRequest`: ```java AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(this); authService.performAuthorizationRequest( authRequest, PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, MyAuthCompleteActivity.class), 0), PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, MyAuthCanceledActivity.class), 0)); ``` The intents may be customized to carry any additional data or flags required for the correct handling of the authorization response. #### Capturing the authorization redirect Once the authorization flow is completed in the browser, the authorization service will redirect to a URI specified as part of the authorization request, providing the response via query parameters. In order for your app to capture this response, it must register with the Android OS as a handler for this redirect URI. We recommend using a custom scheme based redirect URI (i.e. those of form `my.scheme:/path`), as this is the most widely supported across all versions of Android. To avoid conflicts with other apps, it is recommended to configure a distinct scheme using "reverse domain name notation". This can either match your service web domain (in reverse) e.g. `com.example.service` or your package name `com.example.app` or be something completely new as long as it's distinct enough. Using the package name of your app is quite common but it's not always possible if it contains illegal characters for URI schemes (like underscores) or if you already have another handler for that scheme - so just use something else. When a custom scheme is used, AppAuth can be easily configured to capture all redirects using this custom scheme through a manifest placeholder: ```groovy android.defaultConfig.manifestPlaceholders = [ 'appAuthRedirectScheme': 'com.example.app' ] ``` Alternatively, the redirect URI can be directly configured by adding an intent-filter for AppAuth's RedirectUriReceiverActivity to your AndroidManifest.xml: ```xml <activity android:name="net.openid.appauth.RedirectUriReceiverActivity" tools:node="replace"> <intent-filter> <action android:name="android.intent.action.VIEW"/> <category android:name="android.intent.category.DEFAULT"/> <category android:name="android.intent.category.BROWSABLE"/> <data android:scheme="com.example.app"/> </intent-filter> </activity> ``` If an HTTPS redirect URI is required instead of a custom scheme, the same approach (modifying your AndroidManifest.xml) is used: ```xml <activity android:name="net.openid.appauth.RedirectUriReceiverActivity" tools:node="replace"> <intent-filter> <action android:name="android.intent.action.VIEW"/> <category android:name="android.intent.category.DEFAULT"/> <category android:name="android.intent.category.BROWSABLE"/> <data android:scheme="https" android:host="app.example.com" android:path="/oauth2redirect"/> </intent-filter> </activity> ``` HTTPS redirects can be secured by configuring the redirect URI as an [app link](https://developer.android.com/training/app-links/index.html) in Android M and above. We recommend that a fallback page be configured at the same address to forward authorization responses to your app via a custom scheme, for older Android devices. #### Handling the authorization response Upon completion of the authorization flow, the completion Intent provided to performAuthorizationRequest will be triggered. The authorization response is provided to this activity via Intent extra data, which can be extracted using the `fromIntent()` methods on AuthorizationResponse and AuthorizationException respectively: ```java public void onCreate(Bundle b) { AuthorizationResponse resp = AuthorizationResponse.fromIntent(getIntent()); AuthorizationException ex = AuthorizationException.fromIntent(getIntent()); if (resp != null) { // authorization completed } else { // authorization failed, check ex for more details } // ... } ``` The response can be provided to the AuthState instance for easy persistence and further processing: ``` authState.update(resp, ex); ``` If the full redirect URI is required in order to extract additional information that AppAuth does not provide, this is also provided to your activity: ```java public void onCreate(Bundle b) { // ... Uri redirectUri = getIntent().getData(); // ... } ``` ### Exchanging the authorization code Given a successful authorization response carrying an authorization code, a token request can be made to exchange the code for a refresh token: ```java authService.performTokenRequest( resp.createTokenExchangeRequest(), new AuthorizationService.TokenResponseCallback() { @Override public void onTokenRequestCompleted( TokenResponse resp, AuthorizationException ex) { if (resp != null) { // exchange succeeded } else { // authorization failed, check ex for more details } } }); ``` The token response can also be used to update an AuthState instance: ```java authState.update(resp, ex); ``` ### Using access tokens Finally, the retrieved access token can be used to interact with a resource server. This can be done directly, by extracting the access token from a token response. However, in most cases, it is simpler to use the `performActionWithFreshTokens` utility method provided by AuthState: ```java authState.performActionWithFreshTokens(service, new AuthStateAction() { @Override public void execute( String accessToken, String idToken, AuthorizationException ex) { if (ex != null) { // negotiation for fresh tokens failed, check ex for more details return; } // use the access token to do something ... } }); ``` This also updates the AuthState object with current access, id, and refresh tokens. If you are storing your AuthState in persistent storage, you should write the updated copy in the callback to this method. ### Ending current session Given you have a logged in session and you want to end it. In that case you need to get: - `AuthorizationServiceConfiguration` - valid Open Id Token that you should get after authentication - End of session URI that should be provided within you OpenId service config First you have to build EndSessionRequest ```java EndSessionRequest endSessionRequest = new EndSessionRequest.Builder(authorizationServiceConfiguration) .setIdTokenHint(idToken) .setPostLogoutRedirectUri(endSessionRedirectUri) .build(); ``` This request can then be dispatched using one of two approaches. a `startActivityForResult` call using an Intent returned from the `AuthorizationService`, or by calling `performEndSessionRequest` and providing pending intent for completion and cancelation handling activities. The startActivityForResult approach is simpler to use but may require more processing of the result: ```java private void endSession() { AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(this); Intent endSessionItent = authService.getEndSessionRequestIntent(endSessionRequest); startActivityForResult(endSessionItent, RC_END_SESSION); } @Override protected void onActivityResult(int requestCode, int resultCode, Intent data) { if (requestCode == RC_END_SESSION) { EndSessionResonse resp = EndSessionResonse.fromIntent(data); AuthorizationException ex = AuthorizationException.fromIntent(data); // ... process the response or exception ... } else { // ... } } ``` If instead you wish to directly transition to another activity on completion or cancelation, you can use `performEndSessionRequest`: ```java AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(this); authService.performEndSessionRequest( endSessionRequest, PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, MyAuthCompleteActivity.class), 0), PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, MyAuthCanceledActivity.class), 0)); ``` End session flow will also work involving browser mechanism that is described in authorization mechanism session. Handling response mechanism with transition to another activity should be as follows: ```java public void onCreate(Bundle b) { EndSessionResponse resp = EndSessionResponse.fromIntent(getIntent()); AuthorizationException ex = AuthorizationException.fromIntent(getIntent()); if (resp != null) { // authorization completed } else { // authorization failed, check ex for more details } // ... } ``` ### AuthState persistence Instances of `AuthState` keep track of the authorization and token requests and responses. This is the only object that you need to persist to retain the authorization state of the session. Typically, one would do this by storing the authorization state in SharedPreferences or some other persistent store private to the app: ```java @NonNull public AuthState readAuthState() { SharedPreferences authPrefs = getSharedPreferences("auth", MODE_PRIVATE); String stateJson = authPrefs.getString("stateJson", null); if (stateJson != null) { return AuthState.jsonDeserialize(stateJson); } else { return new AuthState(); } } public void writeAuthState(@NonNull AuthState state) { SharedPreferences authPrefs = getSharedPreferences("auth", MODE_PRIVATE); authPrefs.edit() .putString("stateJson", state.jsonSerializeString()) .apply(); } ``` The demo app has an [AuthStateManager](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/app/java/net/openid/appauthdemo/AuthStateManager.java) type which demonstrates this in more detail. ## Advanced configuration AppAuth provides some advanced configuration options via [AppAuthConfiguration](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AppAuthConfiguration.java) instances, which can be provided to [AuthorizationService](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationService.java) during construction. ### Controlling which browser is used for authorization Some applications require explicit control over which browsers can be used for authorization - for example, to require that Chrome be used for second factor authentication to work, or require that some custom browser is used for authentication in an enterprise environment. Control over which browsers can be used can be achieved by defining a [BrowserMatcher](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/BrowserMatcher.java), and supplying this to the builder of AppAuthConfiguration. A BrowserMatcher is suppled with a [BrowserDescriptor](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/BrowserDescriptor.java) instance, and must decide whether this browser is permitted for the authorization flow. By default, [AnyBrowserMatcher](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/AnyBrowserMatcher.java) is used. For your convenience, utility classes to help define a browser matcher are provided, such as: - [Browsers](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/Browsers.java): contains a set of constants for the official package names and signatures of Chrome, Firefox and Samsung SBrowser. - [VersionedBrowserMatcher](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/VersionedBrowserMatcher.java): will match a browser if it has a matching package name and signature, and a version number within a defined [VersionRange](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/VersionRange.java). This class also provides some static instances for matching Chrome, Firefox and Samsung SBrowser. - [BrowserAllowList](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/BrowserAllowList.java): takes a list of BrowserMatcher instances, and will match a browser if any of these child BrowserMatcher instances signals a match. - [BrowserDenyList](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/browser/BrowserDenyList.java): the inverse of BrowserAllowList - takes a list of browser matcher instances, and will match a browser if it _does not_ match any of these child BrowserMatcher instances. For instance, in order to restrict the authorization flow to using Chrome or SBrowser as a custom tab: ```java AppAuthConfiguration appAuthConfig = new AppAuthConfiguration.Builder() .setBrowserMatcher(new BrowserAllowList( VersionedBrowserMatcher.CHROME_CUSTOM_TAB, VersionedBrowserMatcher.SAMSUNG_CUSTOM_TAB)) .build(); AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(context, appAuthConfig); ``` Or, to prevent the use of a buggy version of the custom tabs in Samsung SBrowser: ```java AppAuthConfiguration appAuthConfig = new AppAuthConfiguration.Builder() .setBrowserMatcher(new BrowserDenyList( new VersionedBrowserMatcher( Browsers.SBrowser.PACKAGE_NAME, Browsers.SBrowser.SIGNATURE_SET, true, // when this browser is used via a custom tab VersionRange.atMost("5.3") ))) .build(); AuthorizationService authService = new AuthorizationService(context, appAuthConfig); ``` ### Customizing the connection builder for HTTP requests It can be desirable to customize how HTTP connections are made when performing token requests, for instance to use [certificate pinning](https://www.owasp.org/index.php/Certificate_and_Public_Key_Pinning) or to add additional trusted certificate authorities for an enterprise environment. This can be achieved in AppAuth by providing a custom [ConnectionBuilder](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/connectivity/ConnectionBuilder.java) instance. For example, to custom the SSL socket factory used, one could do the following: ```java AppAuthConfiguration appAuthConfig = new AppAuthConfiguration.Builder() .setConnectionBuilder(new ConnectionBuilder() { public HttpURLConnection openConnect(Uri uri) throws IOException { URL url = new URL(uri.toString()); HttpURLConnection connection = (HttpURLConnection) url.openConnection(); if (connection instanceof HttpsUrlConnection) { HttpsURLConnection connection = (HttpsURLConnection) connection; connection.setSSLSocketFactory(MySocketFactory.getInstance()); } } }) .build(); ``` ### Issues with [ID Token](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/IdToken.java#L118) validation ID Token validation was introduced in `0.8.0` but not all authorization servers or configurations support it correctly. - For testing environments [setSkipIssuerHttpsCheck](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AppAuthConfiguration.java#L129) can be used to bypass the fact the issuer needs to be HTTPS. ```java AppAuthConfiguration appAuthConfig = new AppAuthConfiguration.Builder() .setSkipIssuerHttpsCheck(true) .build() ``` - For services that don't support nonce[s] resulting in **IdTokenException** `Nonce mismatch` just set nonce to `null` on the `AuthorizationRequest`. Please consider **raising an issue** with your Identity Provider and removing this once it is fixed. ```java AuthorizationRequest authRequest = authRequestBuilder .setNonce(null) .build(); ``` ## Dynamic client registration AppAuth supports the [OAuth2 dynamic client registration protocol](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7591). In order to dynamically register a client, create a [RegistrationRequest](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/RegistrationRequest.java) and dispatch it using [performRegistrationRequest](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationService.java#L278) on your AuthorizationService instance. The registration endpoint can either be defined directly as part of your [AuthorizationServiceConfiguration](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/AuthorizationServiceConfiguration.java), or discovered from an OpenID Connect discovery document. ```java RegistrationRequest registrationRequest = new RegistrationRequest.Builder( serviceConfig, Arrays.asList(redirectUri)) .build(); ``` Requests are dispatched with the help of `AuthorizationService`. As this request is asynchronous the response is passed to a callback: ```java service.performRegistrationRequest( registrationRequest, new AuthorizationService.RegistrationResponseCallback() { @Override public void onRegistrationRequestCompleted( @Nullable RegistrationResponse resp, @Nullable AuthorizationException ex) { if (resp != null) { // registration succeeded, store the registration response AuthState state = new AuthState(resp); //proceed to authorization... } else { // registration failed, check ex for more details } } }); ``` ## Utilizing client secrets (DANGEROUS) We _strongly recommend_ you avoid using static client secrets in your native applications whenever possible. Client secrets derived via a dynamic client registration are safe to use, but static client secrets can be easily extracted from your apps and allow others to impersonate your app and steal user data. If client secrets must be used by the OAuth2 provider you are integrating with, we strongly recommend performing the code exchange step on your backend, where the client secret can be kept hidden. Having said this, in some cases using client secrets is unavoidable. In these cases, a [ClientAuthentication](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/ClientAuthentication.java) instance can be provided to AppAuth when performing a token request. This allows additional parameters (both HTTP headers and request body parameters) to be added to token requests. Two standard implementations of ClientAuthentication are provided: - [ClientSecretBasic](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/ClientSecretBasic.java): includes a client ID and client secret as an HTTP Basic Authorization header. - [ClientSecretPost](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/library/java/net/openid/appauth/ClientSecretPost.java): includes a client ID and client secret as additional request parameters. So, in order to send a token request using HTTP basic authorization, one would write: ```java ClientAuthentication clientAuth = new ClientSecretBasic(MY_CLIENT_SECRET); TokenRequest req = ...; authService.performTokenRequest(req, clientAuth, callback); ``` This can also be done when using `performActionWithFreshTokens` on AuthState: ```java ClientAuthentication clientAuth = new ClientSecretPost(MY_CLIENT_SECRET); authState.performActionWithFreshTokens( authService, clientAuth, action); ``` ## Modifying or contributing to AppAuth This project requires the Android SDK for API level 25 (Nougat) to build, though the produced binaries only require API level 16 (Jellybean) to be used. We recommend that you fork and/or clone this repository to make modifications; downloading the source has been known to cause some developers problems. For contributors, see the additional instructions in [CONTRIBUTING.md](https://github.com/openid/AppAuth-Android/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md). ### Building from the Command line AppAuth for Android uses Gradle as its build system. In order to build the library and app binaries, run `./gradlew assemble`. The library AAR files are output to `library/build/outputs/aar`, while the demo app is output to `app/build/outputs/apk`. In order to run the tests and code analysis, run `./gradlew check`. ### Building from Android Studio In AndroidStudio, File -> New -> Import project. Select the root folder (the one with the `build.gradle` file).